patch 7.4.1685

Problem:    There is no easy way to get all the information about a match.
Solution:   Add matchstrpos(). (Ozaki Kiichi)

Filelist

@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		.hgignore \
 		.travis.yml \
 		appveyor.yml \
+		src/appveyor.bat \
 		src/README.txt \
 		src/alloc.h \
 		src/arabic.c \
@@ -261,7 +262,6 @@ SRC_DOS_UNIX =	\
 		src/if_python3.c \
 		src/if_py_both.h \
 		src/if_ruby.c \
-		src/if_sniff.h \
 		src/if_tcl.c \
 		src/proto/if_cscope.pro \
 		src/proto/if_lua.pro \
@@ -291,11 +291,9 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/GvimExt/uninst.bat \
 		README_srcdos.txt \
 		src/INSTALLpc.txt \
-		src/Make_bc3.mak \
 		src/Make_bc5.mak \
 		src/Make_cyg.mak \
 		src/Make_cyg_ming.mak \
-		src/Make_djg.mak \
 		src/Make_ivc.mak \
 		src/Make_dvc.mak \
 		src/Make_ming.mak \
@@ -321,8 +319,6 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/if_perl_msvc/stdbool.h \
 		src/iid_ole.c \
 		src/os_dos.h \
-		src/os_msdos.c \
-		src/os_msdos.h \
 		src/os_w32dll.c \
 		src/os_w32exe.c \
 		src/os_win32.c \
@@ -330,7 +326,6 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/os_win32.h \
 		src/proto/gui_w32.pro \
 		src/proto/if_ole.pro \
-		src/proto/os_msdos.pro \
 		src/proto/os_win32.pro \
 		src/proto/os_mswin.pro \
 		src/testdir/Make_dos.mak \
@@ -345,9 +340,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/vimtbar.h \
 		src/xpm_w32.c \
 		src/xpm_w32.h \
-		src/xxd/Make_bc3.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_bc5.mak \
-		src/xxd/Make_djg.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_ming.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_mvc.mak \
 		nsis/gvim.nsi \
@@ -461,7 +454,6 @@ SRC_EXTRA =	\
 		$(SRC_VMS) \
 		README_os390.txt \
 		src/Make_mint.mak \
-		src/if_sniff.c \
 		src/infplist.xml \
 		src/link.390 \
 		src/os_beos.c \
@@ -491,7 +483,6 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/ftoff.vim \
 		runtime/gvimrc_example.vim \
 		runtime/macros/README.txt \
-		runtime/macros/dvorak \
 		runtime/macros/editexisting.vim \
 		runtime/macros/hanoi/click.me \
 		runtime/macros/hanoi/hanoi.vim \
@@ -503,7 +494,6 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/macros/life/click.me \
 		runtime/macros/life/life.vim \
 		runtime/macros/matchit.vim \
-		runtime/macros/matchit.txt \
 		runtime/macros/maze/README.txt \
 		runtime/macros/maze/[mM]akefile \
 		runtime/macros/maze/main.aap \
@@ -533,6 +523,16 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/tutor/tutor \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.vim \
 		runtime/vimrc_example.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/dvorak/plugin/dvorak.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/dvorak/dvorak/enable.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/dvorak/dvorak/disable.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/editexisting/plugin/editexisting.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/justify/plugin/justify.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/matchit/plugin/matchit.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/matchit/doc/matchit.txt \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/matchit/doc/tags \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/shellmenu/plugin/shellmenu.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/swapmouse/plugin/swapmouse.vim \
 
 # runtime files for all distributions without CR-NL translation
 RT_ALL_BIN =	\
@@ -613,7 +613,6 @@ RT_AMI =	\
 		README.txt.info \
 		README_ami.txt \
 		README_ami.txt.info \
-		libs/arp.library \
 		runtime/doc.info \
 		runtime/doc/*.info \
 		runtime/icons/README.txt \
@@ -700,7 +699,35 @@ EXTRA =		\
 		src/tee/Makefile \
 		src/tee/Make_mvc.mak \
 		src/tee/tee.c \
-		csdpmi4b.zip \
+
+# files in READMEdir that are included from the top dir
+IN_README_DIR = \
+		README.txt.info \
+		README_ami.txt \
+		README_ami.txt.info \
+		README_amibin.txt \
+		README_amibin.txt.info \
+		README_amisrc.txt \
+		README_amisrc.txt.info \
+		README_bindos.txt \
+		README_dos.txt \
+		README_extra.txt \
+		README_mac.txt \
+		README_ole.txt \
+		README_os2.txt \
+		README_os390.txt \
+		README_src.txt \
+		README_srcdos.txt \
+		README_unix.txt \
+		README_vms.txt \
+		README_w32s.txt \
+		Contents \
+		Contents.info \
+		Vim.info \
+		Xxd.info \
+		runtime.info \
+		src.info \
+		vimdir.info \
 
 # generic language files
 LANG_GEN = \

Makefile

@@ -213,24 +213,13 @@ MINOR = 4
 #   > bigvim64.bat
 #
 #
-# OBSOLETE systems: You can build this if you have an appropriate system.
+# OBSOLETE systems: You can build these if you have an appropriate system.
 #
-# 16 bit DOS version: (doesn't build anywhere)
-# - Set environment for compiling with Borland C++ 3.1.
-# - "bmake -f Make_bc3.mak BOR=E:\borlandc" (compiling xxd might fail, in that
-#   case set environment for compiling with Borland C++ 4.0 and do
-#   "make -f make_bc3.mak BOR=E:\BC4 xxd/xxd.exe").
-#   NOTE: this currently fails because Vim is too big.
-# - "make test" and check the output.
-# - Rename the executables to "vimd16.exe", "xxdd16.exe", "installd16.exe" and
-#   "uninstald16.exe".
+# 16 bit DOS version: You need to get a very old version of Vim, for several
+# years even the tiny build is too big to fit in DOS memory.
 #
-# 32 bit DOS version: (requires Windows XP or earlier)
-# - Set environment for compiling with DJGPP; "gmake -f Make_djg.mak".
-# - "rm testdir/*.out", "gmake -f Make_djg.mak test" and check the output for
-#   "ALL DONE".
-# - Rename the executables to "vimd32.exe", "xxdd32.exe", "installd32.exe" and
-#   "uninstald32.exe".
+# 32 bit DOS version: Support was removed in 7.4.1399.  When syncing to before
+# that it probably won't build.
 #
 # Win32s GUI version: (requires a very old compiler)
 # - Set environment for Visual C++ 4.1 (requires a new console window):
@@ -242,12 +231,9 @@ MINOR = 4
 # - Rename "uninstal.exe" to "uninstalw32.exe"
 # - The produced uninstalw32.exe and vimrun.exe are used.
 #
-# OS/2: (requires an OS/2 system)
-# - Unpack the Unix archive.
-# - "make -f Make_os2.mak".
-# - Rename the executables to vimos2.exe, xxdos2.exe and teeos2.exe and copy
-#   them to here.
-# - "make os2bin".
+# OS/2 support was removed in patch 7.4.1008.  If you want to give it a try
+# sync to before that and check the old version of this Makefile for
+# instructions.
 
 VIMVER	= vim-$(MAJOR).$(MINOR)
 VERSION = $(MAJOR)$(MINOR)
@@ -269,9 +255,13 @@ dist:
 	mkdir dist
 
 # Clean up some files to avoid they are included.
+# Copy README files to the top directory.
 prepare:
 	if test -f runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt; then \
 		rm runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt; fi
+	for name in $(IN_README_DIR); do \
+	  cp READMEdir/"$$name" .; \
+	  done
 
 # For the zip files we need to create a file with the comment line
 dist/comment:
@@ -336,6 +326,7 @@ unixall: dist prepare
 		$(EXTRA) \
 		$(LANG_SRC) \
 		| (cd dist/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 # Need to use a "distclean" config.mk file
 # Note: this file is not included in the repository to avoid problems, but it's
 # OK to put it in the archive.
@@ -372,6 +363,7 @@ amirt: dist prepare
 		$(RT_NO_UNIX) \
 		$(RT_AMI_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimdir.info dist/Vim.info
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime.info dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR).info
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime/* dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
@@ -392,6 +384,7 @@ amibin: dist prepare
 		Vim \
 		Xxd \
 		| (cd dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimdir.info dist/Vim.info
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime.info dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR).info
 	cd dist && tar cf vim$(VERSION)bin.tar Vim Vim.info
@@ -410,6 +403,7 @@ amisrc: dist prepare
 		$(SRC_AMI) \
 		$(SRC_AMI_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimdir.info dist/Vim.info
 	mv dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime.info dist/Vim/$(VIMRTDIR).info
 	cd dist && tar cf vim$(VERSION)src.tar Vim Vim.info
@@ -483,6 +477,7 @@ dosrt_files: dist prepare no_title.vim
 		$(RT_DOS_BIN) \
 		$(LANG_GEN_BIN) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 	mv dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime/* dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
 	rmdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime
 # Add the message translations.  Trick: skip ja.mo and use ja.sjis.mo instead.
@@ -517,6 +512,7 @@ dosbin_gvim: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_GVIM)
 	tar cf - \
 		$(BIN_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	-rm $(IN_README_DIR)
 	cp gvim.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gvim.exe
 	cp xxdw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/xxd.exe
 	cp vimrun.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimrun.exe

README.md

@@ -2,25 +2,28 @@
 [![Build Status](https://travis-ci.org/vim/vim.svg?branch=master)](https://travis-ci.org/vim/vim)
 [![Coverage Status](https://coveralls.io/repos/vim/vim/badge.svg?branch=master&service=github)](https://coveralls.io/github/vim/vim?branch=master)
 [![Appveyor Build status](https://ci.appveyor.com/api/projects/status/o2qht2kjm02sgghk?svg=true)](https://ci.appveyor.com/project/chrisbra/vim)
+[![Coverity Scan](https://scan.coverity.com/projects/241/badge.svg)](https://scan.coverity.com/projects/vim)
 
 
 ## What is Vim? ##
 
-Vim is an almost compatible version of the UNIX editor Vi.  Many new features
-have been added: multi-level undo, syntax highlighting, command line history,
-on-line help, spell checking, filename completion, block operations, etc.
-There is also a Graphical User Interface (GUI) available.  See
-`runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt` for differences with Vi.
+Vim is a greatly improved version of the good old UNIX editor Vi.  Many new
+features have been added: multi-level undo, syntax highlighting, command line
+history, on-line help, spell checking, filename completion, block operations,
+script language, etc.  There is also a Graphical User Interface (GUI)
+available.  Still, Vi compatibility is maintained, those who have Vi "in the
+fingers" will feel at home.  See `runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt` for differences with
+Vi.
 
 This editor is very useful for editing programs and other plain text files.
 All commands are given with normal keyboard characters, so those who can type
 with ten fingers can work very fast.  Additionally, function keys can be
-defined by the user, and the mouse can be used.
+mapped to commands by the user, and the mouse can be used.
 
-Vim runs under MS-DOS, MS-Windows (NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10), Macintosh,
-VMS and almost all flavours of UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be
-very difficult.  Older versions of Vim run on MS-Windows 95/98/Me, Amiga DOS,
-Atari MiNT, BeOS, RISC OS and OS/2.  These are no longer maintained.
+Vim runs under MS-Windows (NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10), Macintosh, VMS and
+almost all flavours of UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be very
+difficult.  Older versions of Vim run on MS-DOS, MS-Windows 95/98/Me, Amiga
+DOS, Atari MiNT, BeOS, RISC OS and OS/2.  These are no longer maintained.
 
 
 ## Distribution ##
@@ -38,9 +41,31 @@ want or must compile it yourself.  Check http://www.vim.org/download.php for
 an overview of currently available distributions.
 
 
+## Compiling ##
+
+If you obtained a binary distribution you don't need to compile Vim.  If you
+obtained a source distribution, all the stuff for compiling Vim is in the
+`src` directory.  See `src/INSTALL` for instructions.
+
+
+## Installation ##
+
+See one of these files for system-specific instructions.  Either in the
+READMEdir directory (in the repository) or the top directory (if you unpack an
+archive):
+
+	README_ami.txt		Amiga
+	README_unix.txt		Unix
+	README_dos.txt		MS-DOS and MS-Windows
+	README_mac.txt		Macintosh
+	README_vms.txt		VMS
+
+There are other `README_*.txt` files, depending on the distribution you used.
+
+
 ## Documentation ##
 
-The vim tutor is a one hour training course for beginners.  Mostly it can be
+The Vim tutor is a one hour training course for beginners.  Often it can be
 started as `vimtutor`.  See `:help tutor` for more information.
 
 The best is to use `:help` in Vim.  If you don't have an executable yet, read
@@ -76,26 +101,6 @@ For the most recent information about sponsoring look on the Vim web site:
 	http://www.vim.org/sponsor/
 
 
-## Compiling ##
-
-If you obtained a binary distribution you don't need to compile Vim.  If you
-obtained a source distribution, all the stuff for compiling Vim is in the
-`src` directory.  See `src/INSTALL` for instructions.
-
-
-## Installation ##
-
-See one of these files for system-specific instructions:
-
-	README_ami.txt		Amiga
-	README_unix.txt		Unix
-	README_dos.txt		MS-DOS and MS-Windows
-	README_mac.txt		Macintosh
-	README_vms.txt		VMS
-
-There are more `README_*.txt` files, depending on the distribution you used.
-
-
 ## Contributing ##
 
 If you would like to help making Vim better, see the [CONTRIBUTING.md](https://github.com/vim/vim/blob/master/CONTRIBUTING.md) file.

README.txt

@@ -3,21 +3,23 @@ README.txt for version 7.4 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 WHAT IS VIM?
 
-Vim is an almost compatible version of the UNIX editor Vi.  Many new features
-have been added: multi-level undo, syntax highlighting, command line history,
-on-line help, spell checking, filename completion, block operations, etc.
-There is also a Graphical User Interface (GUI) available.  See
-"runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt" for differences with Vi.
+Vim is a greatly improved version of the good old UNIX editor Vi.  Many new
+features have been added: multi-level undo, syntax highlighting, command line
+history, on-line help, spell checking, filename completion, block operations,
+script language, etc.  There is also a Graphical User Interface (GUI)
+available.  Still, Vi compatibility is maintained, those who have Vi "in the
+fingers" will feel at home.  See "runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt" for differences with
+Vi.
 
 This editor is very useful for editing programs and other plain text files.
 All commands are given with normal keyboard characters, so those who can type
 with ten fingers can work very fast.  Additionally, function keys can be
-defined by the user, and the mouse can be used.
+mapped to commands by the user, and the mouse can be used.
 
-Vim runs under MS-DOS, MS-Windows (NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10), Macintosh,
-VMS and almost all flavours of UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be
-very difficult.  Older versions of Vim run on MS-Windows 95/98/Me, Amiga DOS,
-Atari MiNT, BeOS, RISC OS and OS/2.  These are no longer maintained.
+Vim runs under MS-Windows (NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10), Macintosh, VMS and
+almost all flavours of UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be very
+difficult.  Older versions of Vim run on MS-DOS, MS-Windows 95/98/Me, Amiga
+DOS, Atari MiNT, BeOS, RISC OS and OS/2.  These are no longer maintained.
 
 
 DISTRIBUTION
@@ -35,9 +37,31 @@ want or must compile it yourself.  Check "http://www.vim.org/download.php" for
 an overview of currently available distributions.
 
 
+COMPILING
+
+If you obtained a binary distribution you don't need to compile Vim.  If you
+obtained a source distribution, all the stuff for compiling Vim is in the
+"src" directory.  See src/INSTALL for instructions.
+
+
+INSTALLATION
+
+See one of these files for system-specific instructions.  Either in the
+READMEdir directory (in the repository) or the top directory (if you unpack an
+archive):
+
+README_ami.txt		Amiga
+README_unix.txt		Unix
+README_dos.txt		MS-DOS and MS-Windows
+README_mac.txt		Macintosh
+README_vms.txt		VMS
+
+There are more README_*.txt files, depending on the distribution you used.
+
+
 DOCUMENTATION
 
-The vim tutor is a one hour training course for beginners.  Mostly it can be
+The Vim tutor is a one hour training course for beginners.  Often it can be
 started as "vimtutor".  See ":help tutor" for more information.
 
 The best is to use ":help" in Vim.  If you don't have an executable yet, read
@@ -74,23 +98,9 @@ For the most recent information about sponsoring look on the Vim web site:
 	http://www.vim.org/sponsor/
 
 
-COMPILING
+CONTRIBUTING
 
-If you obtained a binary distribution you don't need to compile Vim.  If you
-obtained a source distribution, all the stuff for compiling Vim is in the
-"src" directory.  See src/INSTALL for instructions.
-
-
-INSTALLATION
-
-See one of these files for system-specific instructions:
-README_ami.txt		Amiga
-README_unix.txt		Unix
-README_dos.txt		MS-DOS and MS-Windows
-README_mac.txt		Macintosh
-README_vms.txt		VMS
-
-There are more README_*.txt files, depending on the distribution you used.
+If you would like to help making Vim better, see the CONTRIBUTING.md file.
 
 
 INFORMATION

READMEdir/Contents

@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Vim		Vi IMproved.  A clone of the UNIX text editor Vi.  Very useful
 		messages, shows current file name in window title, on-line
 		help, rectangular cut/paste, etc., etc., etc...
 
-		Version 7.4.  Also runs under UNIX, MSDOS and other systems.
+		Version 7.4.  Also runs under UNIX, MS-Windows, Mac, etc.
 		vim74rt.tgz  contains the documentation and syntax files.
 		vim74bin.tgz contains the binaries.
 		vim74src.tgz contains the sources.
@@ -19,5 +19,5 @@ Vim		Vi IMproved.  A clone of the UNIX text editor Vi.  Very useful
 Xxd		Hex dumper and reader.  Can be used to view files as hex, edit
 		them and write them back.  Can also be used to patch files.
 
-		Version 1.8 (1997 May 22)
+		Version 1.10 (1997 May 22)
 		Author: Juergen Weigert

appveyor.yml

@@ -2,6 +2,18 @@ version: "{build}"
 
 skip_tags: true
 
+environment:
+  matrix:
+    - FEATURE: HUGE
+    - FEATURE: NORMAL
+# disabled
+#    - FEATURE: TINY
+#    - FEATURE: SMALL
+#    - FEATURE: BIG
+
+matrix:
+  fast_finish: true
+
 before_build:
   - '"C:\Program Files\Microsoft SDKs\Windows\v7.1\Bin\SetEnv.cmd" /x64 /release'
   # Work around for Python 2.7.11's bug
@@ -9,12 +21,14 @@ before_build:
   - reg copy HKLM\SOFTWARE\Python\PythonCore\2.7 HKLM\SOFTWARE\Python\PythonCore\2.7-32 /s /reg:64
 
 build_script:
-  - cd src
-  - sed -e "s/\$(LINKARGS2)/\$(LINKARGS2) | sed -e 's#.*\\\\r.*##'/" Make_mvc.mak > Make_mvc2.mak
-  - nmake -f Make_mvc2.mak CPU=AMD64 GUI=yes IME=yes MBYTE=yes ICONV=yes DEBUG=no PYTHON_VER=27 DYNAMIC_PYTHON=yes PYTHON=C:\Python27-x64 PYTHON3_VER=34 DYNAMIC_PYTHON3=yes PYTHON3=C:\Python34-x64
-  - .\gvim -u NONE -c "redir @a | ver | 0put a | wq!" ver.txt
-  - type ver.txt
+  - src/appveyor.bat
 
 test_script:
-  - cd testdir
+  - cd src/testdir
+    # Testing with MSVC gvim
   - nmake -f Make_dos.mak VIMPROG=..\gvim
+  - nmake -f Make_dos.mak clean
+    # Testing with MingW console version
+  - nmake -f Make_dos.mak VIMPROG=..\vim
+
+# vim: sw=2 sts=2 et ts=2 sr

runtime/doc/Makefile

@@ -32,7 +32,6 @@ DOCS = \
 	ft_ada.txt \
 	ft_sql.txt \
 	gui.txt \
-	gui_w16.txt \
 	gui_w32.txt \
 	gui_x11.txt \
 	hangulin.txt \
@@ -167,7 +166,6 @@ HTMLS = \
 	ft_ada.html \
 	ft_sql.html \
 	gui.html \
-	gui_w16.html \
 	gui_w32.html \
 	gui_x11.html \
 	hangulin.html \
@@ -388,9 +386,6 @@ hebrew.txt:
 russian.txt:
 	touch russian.txt
 
-gui_w16.txt:
-	touch gui_w16.txt
-
 gui_w32.txt:
 	touch gui_w32.txt
 

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Dec 05
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -918,7 +918,15 @@ VimEnter			After doing all the startup stuff, including
 				loading .vimrc files, executing the "-c cmd"
 				arguments, creating all windows and loading
 				the buffers in them.
-							*VimLeave*
+				Just before this event is triggered the
+				|v:vim_did_enter| variable is set, so that you
+				can do: >
+				   if v:vim_did_enter
+				     call s:init()
+				   else
+ 	  			     au VimEnter * call s:init()
+				   endif
+<							*VimLeave*
 VimLeave			Before exiting Vim, just after writing the
 				.viminfo file.  Executed only once, like
 				VimLeavePre.

runtime/doc/change.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 10
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -109,7 +109,9 @@ is an error when 'cpoptions' includes the 'E' flag.
 							*J*
 J			Join [count] lines, with a minimum of two lines.
 			Remove the indent and insert up to two spaces (see
-			below).
+			below).  Fails when on the last line of the buffer.
+			If [count] is too big it is reduce to the number of
+			lines available.
 
 							*v_J*
 {Visual}J		Join the highlighted lines, with a minimum of two

runtime/doc/channel.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*channel.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 20
+*channel.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -44,8 +44,8 @@ There are four main types of jobs:
 4. Running a filter, synchronously.
    Uses pipes.
 
-For when using sockets See |job-start|, |job-may-start| and |channel-open|.
-For 2 and 3, one or more jobs using pipes, see |job-start|.
+For when using sockets See |job-start|, |job-start-nochannel| and
+|channel-open|.  For 2 and 3, one or more jobs using pipes, see |job-start|.
 For 4 use the ":{range}!cmd" command, see |filter|.
 
 Over the socket and pipes these protocols are available:
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ In T1 you should see:
 	=== socket opened === ~
 
 You can now send a message to the server: >
-	echo ch_sendexpr(channel, 'hello!')
+	echo ch_evalexpr(channel, 'hello!')
 
 The message is received in T1 and a response is sent back to Vim.
 You can see the raw messages in T1.  What Vim sends is:
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ To handle asynchronous communication a callback needs to be used: >
 	func MyHandler(channel, msg)
 	  echo "from the handler: " . a:msg
 	endfunc
-	call ch_sendexpr(channel, 'hello!', "MyHandler")
+	call ch_sendexpr(channel, 'hello!', {'callback': "MyHandler"})
 Vim will not wait for a response.  Now the server can send the response later
 and MyHandler will be invoked.
 
@@ -101,97 +101,101 @@ Instead of giving a callback with every send call, it can also be specified
 when opening the channel: >
 	call ch_close(channel)
 	let channel = ch_open('localhost:8765', {'callback': "MyHandler"})
-	call ch_sendexpr(channel, 'hello!', 0)
+	call ch_sendexpr(channel, 'hello!')
+
+When trying out channels it's useful to see what is going on.  You can tell
+Vim to write lines in log file: >
+	call ch_logfile('channellog', 'w')
+See |ch_logfile()|.
 
 ==============================================================================
 3. Opening a channel					*channel-open*
 
 To open a channel: >
     let channel = ch_open({address} [, {options}])
+    if ch_status(channel) == "open"
+      " use the channel
 
 Use |ch_status()| to see if the channel could be opened.
 
 {address} has the form "hostname:port".  E.g., "localhost:8765".
 
-{options} is a dictionary with optional entries:
+{options} is a dictionary with optional entries:	*channel-open-options*
 
 "mode" can be:						*channel-mode*
 	"json" - Use JSON, see below; most convenient way. Default.
 	"js"   - Use JS (JavaScript) encoding, more efficient than JSON.
 	"nl"   - Use messages that end in a NL character
 	"raw"  - Use raw messages
-
-"in-mode"	mode specifically for stdin, only when using pipes
-"out-mode"	mode specifically for stdout, only when using pipes
-"err-mode"	mode specifically for stderr, only when using pipes
-		Note: when setting "mode" the part specific mode is
-		overwritten.  Therefore set "mode" first and the part specific
-		mode later.
-
-							*channel-callback*
+						*channel-callback* *E921*
 "callback"	A function that is called when a message is received that is
 		not handled otherwise.  It gets two arguments: the channel
-		handle and the received message. Example: >
+		and the received message. Example: >
 	func Handle(channel, msg)
 	  echo 'Received: ' . a:msg
 	endfunc
 	let channel = ch_open("localhost:8765", {"callback": "Handle"})
 <
-"out-cb"	A function like "callback" but used for stdout.  Only for when
-		the channel uses pipes.  When "out-cb" wasn't set the channel
-		callback is used.
+		When "mode" is "json" or "js" the "msg" argument is the body
+		of the received message, converted to Vim types.
+		When "mode" is "nl" the "msg" argument is one message,
+		excluding the NL.
+		When "mode" is "raw" the "msg" argument is the whole message
+		as a string.
 
-"err-cb"	A function like "callback" but used for stderr.  Only for when
-		the channel uses pipes.  When "err-cb" wasn't set the channel
-		callback is used.
-
-		TODO:
-"close-cb"	A function that is called when the channel gets closed, other
+		For all callbacks: Use |function()| to bind it to arguments
+		and/or a Dictionary.  Or use the form "dict.function" to bind
+		the Dictionary.
+							*close_cb*
+"close_cb"	A function that is called when the channel gets closed, other
 		than by calling ch_close().  It should be defined like this: >
 	func MyCloseHandler(channel)
-
+<							*waittime*
 "waittime"	The time to wait for the connection to be made in
-		milliseconds.  The default is zero, don't wait, which is
-		useful if the server is supposed to be running already.  A
-		negative number waits forever.
+		milliseconds.  A negative number waits forever.
 
+		The default is zero, don't wait, which is useful if a local
+		server is supposed to be running already.  On Unix Vim
+		actually uses a 1 msec timeout, that is required on many
+		systems.  Use a larger value for a remote server, e.g.  10
+		msec at least.
+							*channel-timeout*
 "timeout"	The time to wait for a request when blocking, E.g. when using
-		ch_sendexpr().  In milliseconds.  The default is 2000 (2
+		ch_evalexpr().  In milliseconds.  The default is 2000 (2
 		seconds).
 
-"out-timeout"	Timeout for stdout.  Only when using pipes.
-"err-timeout"	Timeout for stderr.  Only when using pipes.
-		Note: when setting "timeout" the part specific mode is
-		overwritten.  Therefore set "timeout" first and the part
-		specific mode later.
-
-When "mode" is "json" or "js" the "msg" argument is the body of the received
-message, converted to Vim types.
-When "mode" is "raw" the "msg" argument is the whole message as a string.
-
 When "mode" is "json" or "js" the "callback" is optional.  When omitted it is
 only possible to receive a message after sending one.
 
-To change the channel options after opening it use ch_setoptions().  The
-arguments are similar to what is passed to ch_open(), but "waittime" cannot be
-given, since that only applies to opening the channel.
+To change the channel options after opening it use |ch_setoptions()|.  The
+arguments are similar to what is passed to |ch_open()|, but "waittime" cannot
+be given, since that only applies to opening the channel.
 
-The handler can be added or changed: >
+For example, the handler can be added or changed: >
     call ch_setoptions(channel, {'callback': callback})
 When "callback" is empty (zero or an empty string) the handler is removed.
 
+After a callback has been invoked Vim will update the screen and put the
+cursor back where it belongs.  Thus the callback should not need to do
+`:redraw`.
+
 The timeout can be changed: >
     call ch_setoptions(channel, {'timeout': msec})
 <
-							  *E906*
+							  *channel-close* *E906*
 Once done with the channel, disconnect it like this: >
     call ch_close(channel)
 When a socket is used this will close the socket for both directions.  When
 pipes are used (stdin/stdout/stderr) they are all closed.  This might not be
 what you want!  Stopping the job with job_stop() might be better.
+All readahead is discarded, callbacks will no longer be invoked.
 
-TODO:
-Currently up to 10 channels can be in use at the same time. *E897*
+Note that a channel is closed in three stages:
+  - The I/O ends, log message: "Closing channel". There can still be queued
+    messages to read or callbacks to invoke.
+  - The readahead is cleared, log message: "Clearing channel".  Some variables
+    may still reference the channel.
+  - The channel is freed, log message: "Freeing channel".
 
 When the channel can't be opened you will get an error message.  There is a
 difference between MS-Windows and Unix: On Unix when the port doesn't exist
@@ -205,18 +209,19 @@ If there is an error reading or writing a channel it will be closed.
 4. Using a JSON or JS channel					*channel-use*
 
 If mode is JSON then a message can be sent synchronously like this: >
-    let response = ch_sendexpr(channel, {expr})
+    let response = ch_evalexpr(channel, {expr})
 This awaits a response from the other side.
 
 When mode is JS this works the same, except that the messages use
 JavaScript encoding.  See |js_encode()| for the difference.
 
-To send a message, without handling a response: >
-    call ch_sendexpr(channel, {expr}, 0)
+To send a message, without handling a response or letting the channel callback
+handle the response: >
+    call ch_sendexpr(channel, {expr})
 
 To send a message and letting the response handled by a specific function,
 asynchronously: >
-    call ch_sendexpr(channel, {expr}, {callback})
+    call ch_sendexpr(channel, {expr}, {'callback': Handler})
 
 Vim will match the response with the request using the message ID.  Once the
 response is received the callback will be invoked.  Further responses with the
@@ -249,11 +254,13 @@ message, it must use the number zero:
 Then channel handler will then get {response} converted to Vim types.  If the
 channel does not have a handler the message is dropped.
 
-On read error or ch_close(), when using a socket, the string "DETACH" is sent,
-if still possible.  The channel will then be inactive.
+On read error or ch_close(), when using a socket with RAW or NL mode, the
+string "DETACH\n" is sent, if still possible.  The channel will then be
+inactive.
 
-It is also possible to use ch_sendraw() on a JSON or JS channel.  The caller
-is then completely responsible for correct encoding and decoding.
+It is also possible to use ch_sendraw() and ch_evalraw() on a JSON or JS
+channel.  The caller is then completely responsible for correct encoding and
+decoding.
 
 ==============================================================================
 5. Channel commands					*channel-commands*
@@ -301,6 +308,9 @@ completion or error.  You could use functions in an |autoload| script:
 
 You can also use "call |feedkeys()|" to insert any key sequence.
 
+When there is an error a message is written to the channel log, if it exists,
+and v:errmsg is set to the error.
+
 
 Command "normal" ~
 
@@ -319,7 +329,7 @@ It will send back the result of the expression:
 	[-2, "last line"] ~
 The format is:
 	[{number}, {result}]
-							*E915*
+
 Here {number} is the same as what was in the request.  Use a negative number
 to avoid confusion with message that Vim sends.  Use a different number on
 every request to be able to match the request with the response.
@@ -352,7 +362,7 @@ Leave out the fourth argument if no response is to be sent:
 6. Using a RAW or NL channel				*channel-raw*
 
 If mode is RAW or NL then a message can be send like this: >
-    let response = ch_sendraw(channel, {string})
+    let response = ch_evalraw(channel, {string})
 
 The {string} is sent as-is.  The response will be what can be read from the
 channel right away.  Since Vim doesn't know how to recognize the end of the
@@ -366,18 +376,18 @@ first NL.  This can also be just the NL for an empty response.
 If no NL was read before the channel timeout an empty string is returned.
 
 To send a message, without expecting a response: >
-    call ch_sendraw(channel, {string}, 0)
+    call ch_sendraw(channel, {string})
 The process can send back a response, the channel handler will be called with
 it.
 
 To send a message and letting the response handled by a specific function,
 asynchronously: >
-    call ch_sendraw(channel, {string}, {callback})
+    call ch_sendraw(channel, {string}, {'callback': 'MyHandler'})
 
 This {string} can also be JSON, use |json_encode()| to create it and
 |json_decode()| to handle a received JSON message.
 
-It is not possible to use |ch_sendexpr()| on a raw channel.
+It is not possible to use |ch_evalexpr()| or |ch_sendexpr()| on a raw channel.
 
 ==============================================================================
 7. More channel functions				*channel-more*
@@ -388,8 +398,7 @@ are:
 	"open"		The channel can be used.
 	"closed"	The channel was closed.
 
-TODO:
-To objain the job associated with a channel: ch_getjob(channel)
+To obtain the job associated with a channel: ch_getjob(channel)
 
 To read one message from a channel: >
 	let output = ch_read(channel)
@@ -404,6 +413,23 @@ To read all output from a RAW channel that is available: >
 To read the error output: >
 	let output = ch_readraw(channel, {"part": "err"})
 
+ch_read() and ch_readraw() use the channel timeout.  When there is nothing to
+read within that time an empty string is returned.  To specify a different
+timeout in msec use the "timeout" option:
+	{"timeout": 123} ~
+To read from the error output use the "part" option:
+	{"part": "err"} ~
+To read a message with a specific ID, on a JS or JSON channel:
+	{"id": 99} ~
+When no ID is specified or the ID is -1, the first message is returned. This
+overrules any callback waiting for this message.
+
+For a RAW channel this returns whatever is available, since Vim does not know
+where a message ends.
+For a NL channel this returns one message.
+For a JS or JSON channel this returns one decoded message.
+This includes any sequence number.
+
 ==============================================================================
 8. Starting a job with a channel			*job-start* *job*
 
@@ -419,119 +445,213 @@ been received and not parsed correctly.
 
 If the command produces a line of output that you want to deal with, specify
 a handler for stdout: >
-    let job = job_start(command, {"out-cb": "MyHandler"})
+    let job = job_start(command, {"out_cb": "MyHandler"})
 The function will be called with the channel and a message. You would define
 it like this: >
     func MyHandler(channel, msg)
 
-Without the handler you need to read the output with ch_read().
+Without the handler you need to read the output with |ch_read()| or
+|ch_readraw()|.
 
-The handler defined for "out-cb" will also receive stderr.  If you want to
-handle that separately, add an "err-cb" handler: >
-    let job = job_start(command, {"out-cb": "MyHandler",
-	    \			  "err-cb": "ErrHandler"})
+The handler defined for "out_cb" will not receive stderr.  If you want to
+handle that separately, add an "err_cb" handler: >
+    let job = job_start(command, {"out_cb": "MyHandler",
+	    \			  "err_cb": "ErrHandler"})
 
-You can send a message to the command with ch_sendraw().  If the channel is in
-JSON or JS mode you can use ch_sendexpr().
+If you want to handle both stderr and stdout with one handler use the
+"callback" option: >
+    let job = job_start(command, {"callback": "MyHandler"}) 
+
+You can send a message to the command with ch_evalraw().  If the channel is in
+JSON or JS mode you can use ch_evalexpr().
 
 There are several options you can use, see |job-options|.
+For example, to start a job and write its output in buffer "dummy": >
+	let logjob = job_start("tail -f /tmp/log",
+			     \ {'out_io': 'buffer', 'out_name': 'dummy'})
+	sbuf dummy
 
-TODO:
-To run a job and read its output once it is done: >
 
-	let job = job_start({command}, {'exit-cb': 'MyHandler'})
-	func MyHandler(job, status)
-	  let channel = job_getchannel()
-	  let output = ch_readall(channel)
-	  " parse output
-	endfunc
+Job input from a buffer ~
+
+To run a job that reads from a buffer: >
+	let job = job_start({command},
+	    \ {'in_io': 'buffer', 'in_name': 'mybuffer'})
+<
+							*E915* *E918*
+The buffer is found by name, similar to |bufnr()|. The buffer must exist and
+be loaded when job_start() is called.
+
+By default this reads the whole buffer.  This can be changed with the "in_top"
+and "in_bot" options.
+
+A special mode is when "in_top" is set to zero and "in_bot" is not set: Every
+time a line is added to the buffer, the last-but-one line will be send to the
+job stdin.  This allows for editing the last line and sending it when pressing
+Enter.
 
 ==============================================================================
 9. Starting a job without a channel			*job-start-nochannel*
 
 To start another process without creating a channel: >
-    let job = job_start(command, {"in-io": "null", "out-io": "null"})
+    let job = job_start(command,
+    	\ {"in_io": "null", "out_io": "null", "err_io": "null"})
 
 This starts {command} in the background, Vim does not wait for it to finish.
 
-TODO:
 When Vim sees that neither stdin, stdout or stderr are connected, no channel
 will be created.  Often you will want to include redirection in the command to
 avoid it getting stuck.
 
 There are several options you can use, see |job-options|.
 
-TODO:							*job-may-start*
-To start a job only when connecting to an address does not work use
-job_maystart('command', {address}, {options}), For Example: >
-	let job = job_maystart(command, address, {"waittime": 1000})
-	let channel = job_gethandle(job)
-
-This comes down to: >
+							*job-start-if-needed*
+To start a job only when connecting to an address does not work, do something
+like this: >
 	let channel = ch_open(address, {"waittime": 0})
 	if ch_status(channel) == "fail"
 	  let job = job_start(command)
 	  let channel = ch_open(address, {"waittime": 1000})
-	  call job_sethandle(channel)
 	endif
-Note that the specified waittime applies to when the job has been started.
-This gives the job some time to make the port available.
+
+Note that the waittime for ch_open() gives the job one second to make the port
+available.
 
 ==============================================================================
 10. Job options						*job-options*
 
 The {options} argument in job_start() is a dictionary.  All entries are
-optional.  The same options can be used with job_setoptions(job, {options}).
+optional.  Some options can be used after the job has started, using
+job_setoptions(job, {options}).  Many options can be used with the channel
+related to the job, using ch_setoptions(channel, {options}).
+See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
+
+						*in_mode* *out_mode* *err_mode*
+"in_mode"		mode specifically for stdin, only when using pipes
+"out_mode"		mode specifically for stdout, only when using pipes
+"err_mode"		mode specifically for stderr, only when using pipes
+			See |channel-mode| for the values.
+
+			Note: when setting "mode" the part specific mode is
+			overwritten.  Therefore set "mode" first and the part
+			specific mode later.
+
+			Note: when writing to a file or buffer and when
+			reading from a buffer NL mode is used by default.
 
 						*job-callback*
 "callback": handler	Callback for something to read on any part of the
 			channel.
-						*job-out-cb*
-"out-cb": handler	Callback for when there is something to read on
-			stdout.
-						*job-err-cb*
-"err-cb": handler	Callback for when there is something to read on
-			stderr.
-TODO:						*job-close-cb*
-"close-cb": handler	Callback for when the channel is closed.  Same as
-			"close-cb" on ch_open().
-TODO:						*job-exit-cb*
-"exit-cb": handler	Callback for when the job ends.  The arguments are the
+						*job-out_cb* *out_cb*
+"out_cb": handler	Callback for when there is something to read on
+			stdout.  Only for when the channel uses pipes.  When
+			"out_cb" wasn't set the channel callback is used.
+
+						*job-err_cb* *err_cb*
+"err_cb": handler	Callback for when there is something to read on
+			stderr.  Only for when the channel uses pipes.  When
+			"err_cb" wasn't set the channel callback is used.
+						*job-close_cb*
+"close_cb": handler	Callback for when the channel is closed.  Same as
+			"close_cb" on ch_open().
+						*job-exit_cb*
+"exit_cb": handler	Callback for when the job ends.  The arguments are the
 			job and the exit status.
-TODO:						*job-killonexit*
-"killonexit": 1		Stop the job when Vim exits.
-"killonexit": 0		Do not stop the job when Vim exits.
-			The default is 1.
-TODO:						*job-term*
+			Vim checks about every 10 seconds for jobs that ended.
+			The callback can also be triggered by calling
+			|job_status()|.
+							*job-timeout*
+"timeout"		The time to wait for a request when blocking, E.g.
+			when using ch_evalexpr().  In milliseconds.  The
+			default is 2000 (2 seconds).
+						*out_timeout* *err_timeout*
+"out_timeout"		Timeout for stdout.  Only when using pipes.
+"err_timeout"		Timeout for stderr.  Only when using pipes.
+			Note: when setting "timeout" the part specific mode is
+			overwritten.  Therefore set "timeout" first and the
+			part specific mode later.
+
+						*job-stoponexit*
+"stoponexit": {signal}	Send {signal} to the job when Vim exits.  See
+			|job_stop()| for possible values.
+"stoponexit": ""	Do not stop the job when Vim exits.
+			The default is "term".
+
+						*job-term*
 "term": "open"		Start a terminal and connect the job
 			stdin/stdout/stderr to it.
+			NOTE: Not implemented yet!
 
-TODO:						*job-in-io*
-"in-io": "null"		disconnect stdin
-"in-io": "pipe"		stdin is connected to the channel (default)
-"in-io": "file"		stdin reads from a file
-"in-file": "/path/file"	the file to read from
+"channel": {channel}	Use an existing channel instead of creating a new one.
+			The parts of the channel that get used for the new job
+			will be disconnected from what they were used before.
+			If the channel was still use by another job this may
+			cause I/O errors.
+			Existing callbacks and other settings remain.
 
-TODO:						*job-out-io*
-"out-io": "null"	disconnect stdout
-"out-io": "pipe"	stdout is connected to the channel (default)
-"out-io": "file"	stdout writes to a file
-"out-file": "/path/file" the file to write to
-"out-io": "buffer" 	stdout appends to a buffer
-"out-buffer": "name" 	buffer to append to
+				*job-in_io* *in_top* *in_bot* *in_name* *in_buf*
+"in_io": "null"		disconnect stdin (read from /dev/null)
+"in_io": "pipe"		stdin is connected to the channel (default)
+"in_io": "file"		stdin reads from a file
+"in_io": "buffer"	stdin reads from a buffer
+"in_top": number	when using "buffer": first line to send (default: 1)
+"in_bot": number	when using "buffer": last line to send (default: last)
+"in_name": "/path/file"	the name of the file or buffer to read from
+"in_buf": number	the number of the buffer to read from
 
-TODO:						*job-err-io*
-"err-io": "out"		same type as stdout (default)
-"err-io": "null"	disconnect stderr
-"err-io": "pipe"	stderr is connected to the channel
-"err-io": "file"	stderr writes to a file
-"err-file": "/path/file" the file to write to
-"err-io": "buffer" 	stderr appends to a buffer
-"err-buffer": "name" 	buffer to append to
+				*job-out_io* *out_name* *out_buf*
+"out_io": "null"	disconnect stdout (goes to /dev/null)
+"out_io": "pipe"	stdout is connected to the channel (default)
+"out_io": "file"	stdout writes to a file
+"out_io": "buffer" 	stdout appends to a buffer
+"out_name": "/path/file" the name of the file or buffer to write to
+"out_buf": number	the number of the buffer to write to
 
-TODO: more options
+				*job-err_io* *err_name* *err_buf*
+"err_io": "out"		stderr messages to go to stdout
+"err_io": "null"	disconnect stderr  (goes to /dev/null)
+"err_io": "pipe"	stderr is connected to the channel (default)
+"err_io": "file"	stderr writes to a file
+"err_io": "buffer" 	stderr appends to a buffer
+"err_name": "/path/file" the name of the file or buffer to write to
+"err_buf": number	the number of the buffer to write to
 
 
+Writing to a buffer ~
+
+When the out_io or err_io mode is "buffer" and there is a callback, the text
+is appended to the buffer before invoking the callback.
+
+When a buffer is used both for input and output, the output lines are put
+above the last line, since the last line is what is written to the channel
+input.  Otherwise lines are appended below the last line.
+
+When using JS or JSON mode with "buffer", only messages with zero or negative
+ID will be added to the buffer, after decoding + encoding.  Messages with a
+positive number will be handled by a callback, commands are handled as usual.
+
+The name of the buffer is compared the full name of existing buffers.  If
+there is a match that buffer is used.  Otherwise a new buffer is created.
+Use an empty name to always create a new buffer.  |ch_getbufnr()| can then be
+used to get the buffer number.
+
+For a new buffer 'buftype' is set to "nofile" and 'bufhidden' to "hide".  If
+you prefer other settings, create the buffer first and pass the buffer number.
+
+When the buffer written to is displayed in a window and the cursor is in the
+first column of the last line, the cursor will be moved to the newly added
+line and the window is scrolled up to show the cursor if needed.
+
+Undo is synced for every added line.
+
+
+Writing to a file ~
+							*E920*
+The file is created with permissions 600 (read-write for the user, not
+accessible for others).  Use |setfperm()| to change this.
+
+If the file already exists it is truncated.
+
 ==============================================================================
 11. Controlling a job					*job-control*
 

runtime/doc/eval.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 19
+*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -59,11 +59,11 @@ Dictionary	An associative, unordered array: Each entry has a key and a
 Funcref		A reference to a function |Funcref|.
 		Example: function("strlen")
 
-Special		v:false, v:true, v:none and v:null
+Special		|v:false|, |v:true|, |v:none| and |v:null|.  *Special*
 
-Job		Used for a job, see |job_start()|.
+Job		Used for a job, see |job_start()|. *Job*
 
-Channel		Used for a channel, see |ch_open()|.
+Channel		Used for a channel, see |ch_open()|. *Channel*
 
 The Number and String types are converted automatically, depending on how they
 are used.
@@ -113,16 +113,8 @@ to Float, printf() for Float to String and float2nr() for Float to Number.
 			*E891* *E892* *E893* *E894* *E907* *E911* *E914*
 When expecting a Float a Number can also be used, but nothing else.
 
-						*E706* *sticky-type-checking*
-You will get an error if you try to change the type of a variable.  You need
-to |:unlet| it first to avoid this error.  String and Number are considered
-equivalent though, as well are Float and Number.  Consider this sequence of
-commands: >
-	:let l = "string"
-	:let l = 44		" changes type from String to Number
-	:let l = [1, 2, 3]	" error!  l is still a Number
-	:let l = 4.4		" changes type from Number to Float
-	:let l = "string"	" error!
+						*no-type-checking*
+You will not get an error if you try to change the type of a variable.
 
 
 1.2 Function references ~
@@ -358,10 +350,6 @@ This works like: >
 	:   let index = index + 1
 	:endwhile
 
-Note that all items in the list should be of the same type, otherwise this
-results in error |E706|.  To avoid this |:unlet| the variable at the end of
-the loop.
-
 If all you want to do is modify each item in the list then the |map()|
 function will be a simpler method than a for loop.
 
@@ -765,20 +753,35 @@ recursively.  Ignoring case means case is ignored when comparing item values.
 
 							*E693* *E694*
 A |Funcref| can only be compared with a |Funcref| and only "equal" and "not
-equal" can be used.  Case is never ignored.
+equal" can be used.  Case is never ignored.  Whether arguments or a Dictionary
+are bound (with a partial) is ignored.  This is so that when a function is
+made a member of a Dictionary it is still considered to be the same function.
+To compare partials to see if they bind the same argument and Dictionary
+values use string(): >
+	echo string(Partial1) == string(Partial2)
 
 When using "is" or "isnot" with a |List| or a |Dictionary| this checks if the
 expressions are referring to the same |List| or |Dictionary| instance.  A copy
 of a |List| is different from the original |List|.  When using "is" without
 a |List| or a |Dictionary| it is equivalent to using "equal", using "isnot"
 equivalent to using "not equal".  Except that a different type means the
-values are different: "4 == '4'" is true, "4 is '4'" is false and "0 is []" is
-false and not an error. "is#"/"isnot#" and "is?"/"isnot?" can be used to match
-and ignore case.
+values are different: >
+	echo 4 == '4'
+	1
+	echo 4 is '4'
+	0
+	echo 0 is []
+	0
+"is#"/"isnot#" and "is?"/"isnot?" can be used to match and ignore case.
 
 When comparing a String with a Number, the String is converted to a Number,
-and the comparison is done on Numbers.	This means that "0 == 'x'" is TRUE,
-because 'x' converted to a Number is zero.
+and the comparison is done on Numbers.	This means that: >
+	echo 0 == 'x'
+	1
+because 'x' converted to a Number is zero.  However: >
+	echo [0] == ['x']
+	0
+Inside a List or Dictionary this conversion is not used.
 
 When comparing two Strings, this is done with strcmp() or stricmp().  This
 results in the mathematical difference (comparing byte values), not
@@ -1759,6 +1762,10 @@ v:version	Version number of Vim: Major version number times 100 plus
 		version 5.0 and 5.1 may have a patch 123, but these are
 		completely different.
 
+				*v:vim_did_enter* *vim_did_enter-variable*
+v:vim_did_enter	Zero until most of startup is done.  It is set to one just
+		before |VimEnter| autocommands are triggered.
+
 					*v:warningmsg* *warningmsg-variable*
 v:warningmsg	Last given warning message.  It's allowed to set this variable.
 
@@ -1798,6 +1805,7 @@ assert_equal( {exp}, {act} [, {msg}]) none  assert {exp} equals {act}
 assert_exception( {error} [, {msg}])  none  assert {error} is in v:exception
 assert_fails( {cmd} [, {error}])      none  assert {cmd} fails
 assert_false( {actual} [, {msg}])     none  assert {actual} is false
+assert_match( {pat}, {text} [, {msg}]) none  assert {pat} matches {text}
 assert_true( {actual} [, {msg}])      none  assert {actual} is true
 asin( {expr})			Float	arc sine of {expr}
 atan( {expr})			Float	arc tangent of {expr}
@@ -1817,17 +1825,25 @@ byteidxcomp( {expr}, {nr})	Number	byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr}
 call( {func}, {arglist} [, {dict}])
 				any	call {func} with arguments {arglist}
 ceil( {expr})			Float	round {expr} up
-ch_close( {handle})		none	close a channel
-ch_log( {msg} [, {channel}])	none	write {msg} in the channel log file
+ch_close( {handle})		none	close {handle}
+ch_evalexpr( {handle}, {expr} [, {options}])
+				any	evaluate {expr} on JSON {handle}
+ch_evalraw( {handle}, {string} [, {options}])
+				any	evaluate {string} on raw {handle}
+ch_getbufnr( {handle}, {what})	Number	get buffer number for {handle}/{what}
+ch_getjob( {channel})		Job	get the Job of {channel}
+ch_info( {handle})		String	info about channel  {handle}
+ch_log( {msg} [, {handle}])	none	write {msg} in the channel log file
 ch_logfile( {fname} [, {mode}])	none	start logging channel activity
 ch_open( {address} [, {options}]) Channel open a channel to {address}
-ch_readraw( {handle})		String	read from channel {handle}
+ch_read( {handle} [, {options}])  String  read from  {handle}
+ch_readraw( {handle} [, {options}])  String  read raw from  {handle}
 ch_sendexpr( {handle}, {expr} [, {options}])
-				any	send {expr} over JSON channel {handle}
+				any	send {expr} over JSON {handle}
 ch_sendraw( {handle}, {string} [, {options}])
-				any	send {string} over raw channel {handle}
-ch_setoptions( {handle}, {options})  none  set options for channel {handle}
-ch_status( {handle})		String	status of channel {handle}
+				any	send {string} over raw {handle}
+ch_setoptions( {handle}, {options})  none  set options for {handle}
+ch_status( {handle})		String	status of channel  {handle}
 changenr()			Number	current change number
 char2nr( {expr}[, {utf8}])	Number	ASCII/UTF8 value of first char in {expr}
 cindent( {lnum})		Number	C indent for line {lnum}
@@ -1886,7 +1902,8 @@ foldlevel( {lnum})		Number	fold level at {lnum}
 foldtext()			String	line displayed for closed fold
 foldtextresult( {lnum})		String	text for closed fold at {lnum}
 foreground()			Number	bring the Vim window to the foreground
-function( {name})		Funcref reference to function {name}
+function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
+				Funcref reference to function {name}
 garbagecollect( [{atexit}])	none	free memory, breaking cyclic references
 get( {list}, {idx} [, {def}])	any	get item {idx} from {list} or {def}
 get( {dict}, {key} [, {def}])	any	get item {key} from {dict} or {def}
@@ -1959,11 +1976,14 @@ insert( {list}, {item} [, {idx}]) List	insert {item} in {list} [before {idx}]
 invert( {expr})			Number  bitwise invert
 isdirectory( {directory})	Number	TRUE if {directory} is a directory
 islocked( {expr})		Number	TRUE if {expr} is locked
+isnan( {expr})			Number  TRUE if {expr} is NaN
 items( {dict})			List	key-value pairs in {dict}
-job_getchannel( {job})		Number	get the channel handle for {job}
-job_start( {command} [, {options}]) Job	start a job	
-job_status( {job})		String	get the status of a job
-job_stop( {job} [, {how}])	Number	stop a job
+job_getchannel( {job})		Channel	get the channel handle for {job}
+job_info( {job})		Dict	get information about {job}
+job_setoptions( {job}, {options}) none	set options for {job}
+job_start( {command} [, {options}]) Job	 start a job
+job_status( {job})		String	get the status of {job}
+job_stop( {job} [, {how}])	Number	stop {job}
 join( {list} [, {sep}])		String	join {list} items into one String
 js_decode( {string})		any	decode JS style JSON
 js_encode( {expr})		String	encode JS style JSON
@@ -2000,6 +2020,8 @@ matchlist( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
 				List	match and submatches of {pat} in {expr}
 matchstr( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
 				String	{count}'th match of {pat} in {expr}
+matchstrpos( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
+				List	{count}'th match of {pat} in {expr}
 max( {list})			Number	maximum value of items in {list}
 min( {list})			Number	minimum value of items in {list}
 mkdir( {name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
@@ -2058,6 +2080,7 @@ serverlist()			String	get a list of available servers
 setbufvar( {expr}, {varname}, {val})	set {varname} in buffer {expr} to {val}
 setcharsearch( {dict})		Dict	set character search from {dict}
 setcmdpos( {pos})		Number	set cursor position in command-line
+setfperm( {fname}, {mode})	Number	set {fname} file permissions to {mode}
 setline( {lnum}, {line})	Number	set line {lnum} to {line}
 setloclist( {nr}, {list}[, {action}])
 				Number	modify location list using {list}
@@ -2119,9 +2142,12 @@ tabpagewinnr( {tabarg}[, {arg}])
 				Number	number of current window in tab page
 taglist( {expr})		List	list of tags matching {expr}
 tagfiles()			List	tags files used
-tempname()			String	name for a temporary file
 tan( {expr})			Float	tangent of {expr}
 tanh( {expr})			Float	hyperbolic tangent of {expr}
+tempname()			String	name for a temporary file
+timer_start( {time}, {callback} [, {options}])
+				Number	create a timer
+timer_stop( {timer})		none	stop a timer
 tolower( {expr})		String	the String {expr} switched to lowercase
 toupper( {expr})		String	the String {expr} switched to uppercase
 tr( {src}, {fromstr}, {tostr})	String	translate chars of {src} in {fromstr}
@@ -2136,6 +2162,11 @@ values( {dict})			List	values in {dict}
 virtcol( {expr})		Number	screen column of cursor or mark
 visualmode( [expr])		String	last visual mode used
 wildmenumode()			Number	whether 'wildmenu' mode is active
+win_findbuf( {bufnr}) 		List	find windows containing {bufnr}
+win_getid( [{win} [, {tab}]]) 	Number	get window ID for {win} in {tab}
+win_gotoid( {expr})		Number	go to window with ID {expr}
+win_id2tabwin( {expr})		List	get tab and window nr from window ID
+win_id2win( {expr})		Number	get window nr from window ID
 winbufnr( {nr})			Number	buffer number of window {nr}
 wincol()			Number	window column of the cursor
 winheight( {nr})		Number	height of window {nr}
@@ -2287,6 +2318,26 @@ assert_false({actual} [, {msg}])				*assert_false()*
 		When {msg} is omitted an error in the form "Expected False but
 		got {actual}" is produced.
 
+								*assert_match()*
+assert_match({pattern}, {actual} [, {msg}])
+		When {pattern} does not match {actual} an error message is
+		added to |v:errors|.
+
+		{pattern} is used as with |=~|: The matching is always done
+		like 'magic' was set and 'cpoptions' is empty, no matter what
+		the actual value of 'magic' or 'cpoptions' is.
+
+		{actual} is used as a string, automatic conversion applies.
+		Use "^" and "$" to match with the start and end of the text.
+		Use both to match the whole text.
+
+		When {msg} is omitted an error in the form "Pattern {pattern}
+		does not match {actual}" is produced.
+		Example: >
+	assert_match('^f.*o$', 'foobar')
+<		Will result in a string to be added to |v:errors|:
+	test.vim line 12: Pattern '^f.*o$' does not match 'foobar' ~
+
 assert_true({actual} [, {msg}])					*assert_true()*
 		When {actual} is not true an error message is added to
 		|v:errors|, like with |assert_equal()|.
@@ -2685,14 +2736,89 @@ confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
 		the horizontal layout is always used.
 
 ch_close({handle})						*ch_close()*
-		Close channel {handle}.  See |channel|.
+		Close {handle}.  See |channel-close|.
+		{handle} can be Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+
 		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
 
-ch_log({msg} [, {channel}])					*ch_log()*
+ch_evalexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])			*ch_evalexpr()*
+		Send {expr} over {handle}.  The {expr} is encoded
+		according to the type of channel.  The function cannot be used
+		with a raw channel.  See |channel-use|.
+		{handle} can be Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+								*E917*
+		{options} must be a Dictionary.  It must not have a "callback"
+		entry.  It can have a "timeout" entry to specify the timeout
+		for this specific request.
+
+		ch_evalexpr() waits for a response and returns the decoded
+		expression.  When there is an error or timeout it returns an
+		empty string.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_evalraw({handle}, {string} [, {options}])		*ch_evalraw()*
+		Send {string} over {handle}.
+		{handle} can be Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+
+		Works like |ch_evalexpr()|, but does not encode the request or
+		decode the response.  The caller is responsible for the
+		correct contents.  Also does not add a newline for a channel
+		in NL mode, the caller must do that.  The NL in the response
+		is removed.
+		See |channel-use|.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_getbufnr({handle}, {what})				 *ch_getbufnr()*
+		Get the buffer number that {handle} is using for {what}.
+		{handle} can be Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+		{what} can be "err" for stderr, "out" for stdout or empty for
+		socket output.
+		Returns -1 when there is no buffer.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_getjob({channel})						*ch_getjob()*
+		Get the Job associated with {channel}.
+		If there is no job calling |job_status()| on the returned Job
+		will result in "fail".
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| and
+		|+job| features}
+
+ch_info({handle})						*ch_info()*
+		Returns a Dictionary with information about {handle}.  The
+		items are:
+		   "id"		  number of the channel
+		   "status"	  "open" (any part is open) or "closed"
+		When opened with ch_open():
+		   "hostname"	  the hostname of the address
+		   "port"	  the port of the address
+		   "sock_status"  "open" or "closed"
+		   "sock_mode"	  "NL", "RAW", "JSON" or "JS"
+		   "sock_io"	  "socket"
+		   "sock_timeout" timeout in msec
+		When opened with job_start():
+		   "out_status"	  "open" or "closed"
+		   "out_mode"	  "NL", "RAW", "JSON" or "JS"
+		   "out_io"	  "null", "pipe", "file" or "buffer"
+		   "out_timeout"  timeout in msec
+		   "err_status"	  "open" or "closed"
+		   "err_mode"	  "NL", "RAW", "JSON" or "JS"
+		   "err_io"	  "out", "null", "pipe", "file" or "buffer"
+		   "err_timeout"  timeout in msec
+		   "in_status"	  "open" or "closed"
+		   "in_mode"	  "NL", "RAW", "JSON" or "JS"
+		   "in_io"	  "null", "pipe", "file" or "buffer"
+		   "in_timeout"	  timeout in msec
+
+ch_log({msg} [, {handle}])					*ch_log()*
 		Write {msg} in the channel log file, if it was opened with
 		|ch_logfile()|.
-		When {channel} is passed the channel number is used for the
-		message.  {channel} must be an open channel.
+		When {handle} is passed the channel number is used for the
+		message.
+		{handle} can be Channel or a Job that has a Channel.  The
+		Channel must open.
 
 ch_logfile({fname} [, {mode}])					*ch_logfile()*
 		Start logging channel activity to {fname}.
@@ -2704,55 +2830,41 @@ ch_logfile({fname} [, {mode}])					*ch_logfile()*
 		The file is flushed after every message, on Unix you can use
 		"tail -f" to see what is going on in real time.
 
+
 ch_open({address} [, {options}])				*ch_open()*
 		Open a channel to {address}.  See |channel|.
-		Returns the channel handle on success.  Returns a negative
-		number for failure.
+		Returns a Channel.  Use |ch_status()| to check for failure.
 
 		{address} has the form "hostname:port", e.g.,
 		"localhost:8765".
 
-		If {options} is given it must be a |Dictionary|.  The optional
-		items are:
-			mode        "raw", "js" or "json".
-				    Default "json".
-			callback    function to call for requests with a zero
-				    sequence number.  See |channel-callback|.
-				    Default: none.
-			waittime    Specify connect timeout as milliseconds.
-				    Negative means forever.
-				    Default: 0 (don't wait)
-			timeout	    Specify response read timeout value as
-				    milliseconds. 
-				    Default: 2000.
+		If {options} is given it must be a |Dictionary|.
+		See |channel-open-options|.
+
 		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
 
-ch_readraw({handle})						*ch_readraw()*
-		Read from channel {handle} and return the received message.
-		This uses the channel timeout.  When there is nothing to read
-		within that time an empty string is returned.
-		TODO: depends on channel mode.
+ch_read({handle} [, {options}])					*ch_read()*
+		Read from {handle} and return the received message.
+		{handle} can be Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+		See |channel-more|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_readraw({handle} [, {options}])			*ch_readraw()*
+		Like ch_read() but for a JS and JSON channel does not decode
+		the message.  See |channel-more|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
 
 ch_sendexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])			*ch_sendexpr()*
-		Send {expr} over channel {handle}.  The {expr} is encoded
+		Send {expr} over {handle}.  The {expr} is encoded
 		according to the type of channel.  The function cannot be used
-		with a raw channel.  See |channel-use|.  *E912*
-
-		{options} must be a Dictionary.
-		When "callback" is a Funcref or the name of a function,
-		ch_sendexpr() returns immediately.  The callback is invoked
-		when the response is received.  See |channel-callback|.
-
-		Without "callback" ch_sendexpr() waits for a response and
-		returns the decoded expression.  When there is an error or
-		timeout it returns an empty string.
-
-		When "callback" is zero no response is expected.
+		with a raw channel.
+		See |channel-use|.				*E912*
+		{handle} can be Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
 
 		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
 
 ch_sendraw({handle}, {string} [, {options}])		*ch_sendraw()*
-		Send {string} over channel {handle}.
+		Send {string} over {handle}.
 		Works like |ch_sendexpr()|, but does not encode the request or
 		decode the response.  The caller is responsible for the
 		correct contents.  Also does not add a newline for a channel
@@ -2763,20 +2875,25 @@ ch_sendraw({handle}, {string} [, {options}])		*ch_sendraw()*
 		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
 
 ch_setoptions({handle}, {options})			*ch_setoptions()*
-		Set options on channel {handle}:
+		Set options on {handle}:
 			"callback"	the channel callback
 			"timeout"	default read timeout in msec
+			"mode"		mode for the whole channel
 		See |ch_open()| for more explanation.
+		{handle} can be Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+
+		Note that changing the mode may cause queued messages to be
+		lost.
 
 		These options cannot be changed:
-			"mode"		cannot be changed once channel is open
 			"waittime"	only applies to "ch_open()|
 
 ch_status({handle})						*ch_status()*
-		Return the status of channel {handle}:
+		Return the status of {handle}:
 			"fail"		failed to open the channel
 			"open"		channel can be used
 			"closed"	channel can not be used
+		{handle} can be Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
 
 							*copy()*
 copy({expr})	Make a copy of {expr}.	For Numbers and Strings this isn't
@@ -3473,9 +3590,68 @@ foreground()	Move the Vim window to the foreground.	Useful when sent from
 		Win32 console version}
 
 
-function({name})					*function()* *E700*
+					*function()* *E700* *E922* *E923*
+function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
 		Return a |Funcref| variable that refers to function {name}.
-		{name} can be a user defined function or an internal function.
+		{name} can be the name of a user defined function or an
+		internal function.
+
+		{name} can also be a Funcref, also a partial.  When it is a
+		partial the dict stored in it will be used and the {dict}
+		argument is not allowed. E.g.: >
+			let FuncWithArg = function(dict.Func, [arg])
+			let Broken = function(dict.Func, [arg], dict)
+<
+		When {arglist} or {dict} is present this creates a partial.
+		That mans the argument list and/or the dictionary is stored in
+		the Funcref and will be used when the Funcref is called.
+		
+		The arguments are passed to the function in front of other
+		arguments.  Example: >
+			func Callback(arg1, arg2, name)
+			...
+			let Func = function('Callback', ['one', 'two'])
+			...
+			call Func('name')
+<		Invokes the function as with: >
+			call Callback('one', 'two', 'name')
+
+<		The function() call can be nested to add more arguments to the
+		Funcref.  The extra arguments are appended to the list of
+		arguments.  Example: >
+			func Callback(arg1, arg2, name)
+			...
+			let Func = function('Callback', ['one'])
+			let Func2 = function(Func, ['two'])
+			...
+			call Func2('name')
+<		Invokes the function as with: >
+			call Callback('one', 'two', 'name')
+
+<		The Dictionary is only useful when calling a "dict" function.
+		In that case the {dict} is passed in as "self". Example: >
+			function Callback() dict
+			   echo "called for " . self.name
+			endfunction
+			...
+			let context = {"name": "example"}
+			let Func = function('Callback', context)
+			...
+			call Func()	" will echo: called for example
+<		The use of function() is not needed when there are no extra
+		arguments, these two are equivalent: >
+			let Func = function('Callback', context)
+			let Func = context.Callback
+
+<		The argument list and the Dictionary can be combined: >
+			function Callback(arg1, count) dict
+			...
+			let context = {"name": "example"}
+			let Func = function('Callback', ['one'], context)
+			...
+			call Func(500)
+<		Invokes the function as with: >
+			call context.Callback('one', 500)
 
 
 garbagecollect([{atexit}])				*garbagecollect()*
@@ -3744,6 +3920,8 @@ getfperm({fname})					*getfperm()*
 <		This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display
 		the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------".
 
+		For setting permissins use |setfperm()|.
+
 getftime({fname})					*getftime()*
 		The result is a Number, which is the last modification time of
 		the given file {fname}.  The value is measured as seconds
@@ -4364,17 +4542,39 @@ islocked({expr})					*islocked()* *E786*
 <		When {expr} is a variable that does not exist you get an error
 		message.  Use |exists()| to check for existence.
 
+isnan({expr})						*isnan()*
+		Return non-zero if {expr} is a float with value NaN. >
+			echo isnan(0.0 / 0.0)
+<			1 ~
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
 items({dict})						*items()*
 		Return a |List| with all the key-value pairs of {dict}.  Each
 		|List| item is a list with two items: the key of a {dict}
 		entry and the value of this entry.  The |List| is in arbitrary
 		order.
 
-
 job_getchannel({job})					 *job_getchannel()*
 		Get the channel handle that {job} is using.
+		To check if the job has no channel: >
+			if string(job_getchannel()) == 'channel fail'
+<
 		{only available when compiled with the |+job| feature}
 
+job_info({job})						*job_info()*
+		Returns a Dictionary with information about {job}:
+		   "status"	what |job_status()| returns
+		   "channel"	what |job_getchannel()| returns
+		   "exitval"	only valid when "status" is "dead"
+		   "exit_cb"	function to be called on exit
+		   "stoponexit"	|job-stoponexit|
+
+job_setoptions({job}, {options})			*job_setoptions()*
+		Change options for {job}.  Supported are:
+		   "stoponexit"	|job-stoponexit|
+		   "exit_cb"	|job-exit_cb|
+
 job_start({command} [, {options}])			*job_start()*
 		Start a job and return a Job object.  Unlike |system()| and
 		|:!cmd| this does not wait for the job to finish.
@@ -4415,32 +4615,43 @@ job_start({command} [, {options}])			*job_start()*
 
 		{only available when compiled with the |+job| feature}
 
-job_status({job})						*job_status()*
+job_status({job})					*job_status()* *E916*
 		Returns a String with the status of {job}:
 			"run"	job is running
 			"fail"	job failed to start
 			"dead"	job died or was stopped after running
+		
+		If an exit callback was set with the "exit-cb" option and the
+		job is now detected to be "dead" the callback will be invoked.
+
+		For more information see |job_info()|.
 
 		{only available when compiled with the |+job| feature}
 
 job_stop({job} [, {how}])					*job_stop()*
 		Stop the {job}.  This can also be used to signal the job.
 
-		When {how} is omitted or is "term" the job will be terminated
-		normally.  For Unix SIGTERM is sent.  For MS-Windows
-		CTRL_BREAK will be sent.  This goes to the process group, thus
-		children may also be affected.
+		When {how} is omitted or is "term" the job will be terminated.
+		For Unix SIGTERM is sent.  On MS-Windows the job will be
+		terminated forcedly (there is no "gentle" way).
+		This goes to the process group, thus children may also be
+		affected.
 
-		Other values for Unix:
-			"hup"	Unix: SIGHUP
-			"quit"	Unix: SIGQUIT
-			"kill"	Unix: SIGKILL (strongest way to stop)
-			number	Unix: signal with that number
+		Effect for Unix:
+			"term"	 SIGTERM (default)
+			"hup"	 SIGHUP
+			"quit"	 SIGQUIT
+			"int"	 SIGINT
+			"kill"	 SIGKILL (strongest way to stop)
+			number	 signal with that number
 
-		Other values for MS-Windows:
-			"int"	Windows: CTRL_C
-			"kill"	Windows: terminate process forcedly
-			Others	Windows: CTRL_BREAK
+		Effect for MS-Windows:
+			"term"	 terminate process forcedly (default)
+			"hup"	 CTRL_BREAK
+			"quit"	 CTRL_BREAK
+			"int"	 CTRL_C
+			"kill"	 terminate process forcedly
+			Others	 CTRL_BREAK
 
 		On Unix the signal is sent to the process group.  This means
 		that when the job is "sh -c command" it affects both the shell
@@ -4507,6 +4718,8 @@ json_encode({expr})					*json_encode()*
 		Vim values are converted as follows:
 		   Number		decimal number
 		   Float		floating point number
+		   Float nan		"NaN"
+		   Float inf		"Infinity"
 		   String		in double quotes (possibly null)
 		   Funcref		not possible, error
 		   List			as an array (possibly null); when
@@ -4517,13 +4730,9 @@ json_encode({expr})					*json_encode()*
 		   v:true		"true"
 		   v:none		"null"
 		   v:null		"null"
-		Note that using v:none is permitted, although the JSON
-		standard does not allow empty items.  This can be useful for
-		omitting items in an array:
-			[0,,,,,5] ~
-		This is much more efficient than:
-			[0,null,null,null,null,5] ~
-		But a strict JSON parser will not accept it.
+		Note that NaN and Infinity are passed on as values.  This is
+		missing in the JSON standard, but several implementations do
+		allow it.  If not then you will get an error.
 
 keys({dict})						*keys()*
 		Return a |List| with all the keys of {dict}.  The |List| is in
@@ -4997,6 +5206,24 @@ matchstr({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])			*matchstr()*
 			:echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 5)
 <		result is "".
 		When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item is returned.
+		The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String.
+
+matchstrpos({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])		*matchstrpos()*
+		Same as |matchstr()|, but return the matched string, the start
+		position and the end position of the match.  Example: >
+			:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing")
+<		results in ["ing", 4, 7].
+		When there is no match ["", -1, -1] is returned.
+		The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
+			:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 2)
+<		results in ["ing", 4, 7]. >
+			:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 5)
+<		result is ["", -1, -1].
+		When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item, the index
+		of first item where {pat} matches, the start position and the
+		end position of the match are returned. >
+			:echo matchstrpos([1, '__x'], '\a')
+<		result is ["x", 1, 2, 3].
 		The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String.
 
 							*max()*
@@ -5897,6 +6124,24 @@ setcmdpos({pos})					*setcmdpos()*
 		Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command
 		line.
 
+setfperm({fname}, {mode})				*setfperm()* *chmod*
+		Set the file permissions for {fname} to {mode}.
+		{mode} must be a string with 9 characters.  It is of the form
+		"rwxrwxrwx", where each group of "rwx" flags represent, in
+		turn, the permissions of the owner of the file, the group the
+		file belongs to, and other users.  A '-' character means the
+		permission is off, any other character means on.  Multi-byte
+		characters are not supported.
+
+		For example "rw-r-----" means read-write for the user,
+		readable by the group, not accessible by others.  "xx-x-----"
+		would do the same thing.
+
+		Returns non-zero for success, zero for failure.
+
+		To read permissions see |getfperm()|.
+
+
 setline({lnum}, {text})					*setline()*
 		Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}.  To insert
 		lines use |append()|.
@@ -6434,13 +6679,17 @@ string({expr})	Return {expr} converted to a String.  If {expr} is a Number,
 		Float, String or a composition of them, then the result can be
 		parsed back with |eval()|.
 			{expr} type	result ~
-			String		'string'
+			String		'string' (single quotes are doubled)
 			Number		123
 			Float		123.123456 or 1.123456e8
 			Funcref		function('name')
 			List		[item, item]
 			Dictionary	{key: value, key: value}
-		Note that in String values the ' character is doubled.
+
+		When a List or Dictionary has a recursive reference it is
+		replaced by "[...]" or "{...}".  Using eval() on the result
+		will then fail.
+
 		Also see |strtrans()|.
 
 							*strlen()*
@@ -6714,8 +6963,7 @@ systemlist({expr} [, {input}])				*systemlist()*
 		is the same as |readfile()| will output with {binary} argument 
 		set to "b".
 
-		Returns an empty string on error, so be careful not to run 
-		into |E706|.
+		Returns an empty string on error.
 
 
 tabpagebuflist([{arg}])					*tabpagebuflist()*
@@ -6831,6 +7079,37 @@ tanh({expr})						*tanh()*
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
 
 
+							*timer_start()*
+timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}])
+		Create a timer and return the timer ID.
+
+		{time} is the waiting time in milliseconds. This is the
+		minimum time before invoking the callback.  When the system is
+		busy or Vim is not waiting for input the time will be longer.
+
+		{callback} is the function to call.  It can be the name of a
+		function or a Funcref.  It is called with one argument, which
+		is the timer ID.  The callback is only invoked when Vim is
+		waiting for input.
+
+		{options} is a dictionary.  Supported entries:
+		   "repeat"	Number of times to repeat calling the
+		   		callback.  -1 means forever.
+
+		Example: >
+			func MyHandler(timer)
+			  echo 'Handler called'
+			endfunc
+			let timer = timer_start(500, 'MyHandler',
+				\ {'repeat': 3})
+<		This will invoke MyHandler() three times at 500 msec
+		intervals.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
+
+timer_stop({timer})					*timer_stop()*
+		Stop a timer.  {timer} is an ID returned by timer_start().
+		The timer callback will no longer be invoked.
+
 tolower({expr})						*tolower()*
 		The result is a copy of the String given, with all uppercase
 		characters turned into lowercase (just like applying |gu| to
@@ -7031,6 +7310,33 @@ wildmenumode()					*wildmenumode()*
 		(Note, this needs the 'wildcharm' option set appropriately).
 
 
+win_findbuf({bufnr})					*win_findbuf()*
+		Returns a list with window IDs for windows that contain buffer
+		{bufnr}.  When there is none the list is empty.
+
+win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]])				*win_getid()*
+		Get the window ID for the specified window.
+		When {win} is missing use the current window.
+		With {win} this is the window number.  The top window has
+		number 1.
+		Without {tab} use the current tab, otherwise the tab with
+		number {tab}.  The first tab has number one.
+		Return zero if the window cannot be found.
+
+win_gotoid({expr})					*win_gotoid()*
+		Go to window with ID {expr}.  This may also change the current
+		tabpage.
+		Return 1 if successful, 0 if the window cannot be found.
+
+win_id2tabwin({expr}					*win_id2tabwin()*
+		Return a list with the tab number and window number of window
+		with ID {expr}: [tabnr, winnr].
+		Return [0, 0] if the window cannot be found.
+
+win_id2win({expr})					*win_id2win()*
+		Return the window number of window with ID {expr}.
+		Return 0 if the window cannot be found in the current tabpage.
+
 							*winbufnr()*
 winbufnr({nr})	The result is a Number, which is the number of the buffer
 		associated with window {nr}.  When {nr} is zero, the number of
@@ -7275,6 +7581,7 @@ gui_athena		Compiled with Athena GUI.
 gui_gnome		Compiled with Gnome support (gui_gtk is also defined).
 gui_gtk			Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version).
 gui_gtk2		Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
+gui_gtk3		Compiled with GTK+ 3 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
 gui_mac			Compiled with Macintosh GUI.
 gui_motif		Compiled with Motif GUI.
 gui_photon		Compiled with Photon GUI.
@@ -7338,7 +7645,6 @@ scrollbind		Compiled with 'scrollbind' support.
 showcmd			Compiled with 'showcmd' support.
 signs			Compiled with |:sign| support.
 smartindent		Compiled with 'smartindent' support.
-sniff			Compiled with SNiFF interface support.
 spell			Compiled with spell checking support |spell|.
 startuptime		Compiled with |--startuptime| support.
 statusline		Compiled with support for 'statusline', 'rulerformat'
@@ -7360,12 +7666,14 @@ termresponse		Compiled with support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|.
 textobjects		Compiled with support for |text-objects|.
 tgetent			Compiled with tgetent support, able to use a termcap
 			or terminfo file.
+timers			Compiled with |timer_start()| support.
 title			Compiled with window title support |'title'|.
 toolbar			Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|.
 unix			Unix version of Vim.
 user_commands		User-defined commands.
 vertsplit		Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|.
 vim_starting		True while initial source'ing takes place. |startup|
+			*vim_starting*
 viminfo			Compiled with viminfo support.
 virtualedit		Compiled with 'virtualedit' option.
 visual			Compiled with Visual mode.
@@ -7375,7 +7683,6 @@ vms			VMS version of Vim.
 vreplace		Compiled with |gR| and |gr| commands.
 wildignore		Compiled with 'wildignore' option.
 wildmenu		Compiled with 'wildmenu' option.
-win16			Win16 version of Vim (MS-Windows 3.1).
 win32			Win32 version of Vim (MS-Windows 95 and later, 32 or
 			64 bits)
 win32unix		Win32 version of Vim, using Unix files (Cygwin)

runtime/doc/gui.txt

@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Other GUI documentation:
 
 First you must make sure you actually have a version of Vim with the GUI code
 included.  You can check this with the ":version" command, it says "with xxx
-GUI", where "xxx" is X11-Motif, X11-Athena, Photon, GTK, GTK2, etc., or
+GUI", where "xxx" is X11-Motif, X11-Athena, Photon, GTK2, GTK3, etc., or
 "MS-Windows 32 bit GUI version".
 
 How to start the GUI depends on the system used.  Mostly you can run the
@@ -514,11 +514,14 @@ a menu entry.  Hit <Enter> to execute it.  Hit <Esc> if you want to cancel.
 This does require the |+menu| feature enabled at compile time.
 
 							*tear-off-menus*
-GTK+ and Motif support Tear-off menus.  These are sort of sticky menus or
+GTK+ 2 and Motif support Tear-off menus.  These are sort of sticky menus or
 pop-up menus that are present all the time.  If the resizing does not work
 correctly, this may be caused by using something like "Vim*geometry" in the
 defaults.  Use "Vim.geometry" instead.
 
+As to GTK+ 3, tear-off menus have been deprecated since GTK+ 3.4.
+Accordingly, they are disabled if gvim is linked against GTK+ 3.4 or later.
+
 The Win32 GUI version emulates Motif's tear-off menus.  Actually, a Motif user
 will spot the differences easily, but hopefully they're just as useful.  You
 can also use the |:tearoff| command together with |hidden-menus| to create
@@ -650,8 +653,8 @@ When no or zero priority is given, 500 is used.
 The priority for the PopUp menu is not used.
 
 The Help menu will be placed on the far right side of the menu bar on systems
-which support this (Motif and GTK+).  For GTK+ 2, this is not done anymore
-because right-aligning the Help menu is now discouraged UI design.
+which support this (Motif and GTK+).  For GTK+ 2 and 3, this is not done
+anymore because right-aligning the Help menu is now discouraged UI design.
 
 You can use a priority higher than 9999, to make it go after the Help menu,
 but that is non-standard and is discouraged.  The highest possible priority is

runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt

@@ -369,6 +369,16 @@ Write this in the file ~/.gtkrc and it will be used by GTK+.  For GTK+ 2
 you might have to use the file ~/.gtkrc-2.0 instead, depending on your
 distribution.
 
+For GTK+ 3, an effect similar to the above can be obtained by adding the
+following snippet of CSS code to $XDG_HOME_DIR/gtk-3.0/gtk.css (usually,
+$HOME/.config/gtk-3.0/gtk.css):
+ >
+	.tooltip {
+		background-color: #ffffcc;
+		color: #000000;
+	}
+<
+
 Using Vim as a GTK+ plugin				*gui-gtk-socketid*
 
 When the GTK+ version of Vim starts up normally, it creates its own top level

runtime/doc/help.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 10
+*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 27
 
 			VIM - main help file
 									 k
@@ -155,7 +155,6 @@ Special issues ~
 
 GUI ~
 |gui.txt|	Graphical User Interface (GUI)
-|gui_w16.txt|	Windows 3.1 GUI
 |gui_w32.txt|	Win32 GUI
 |gui_x11.txt|	X11 GUI
 
@@ -165,7 +164,6 @@ Interfaces ~
 |if_mzsch.txt|	MzScheme interface
 |if_perl.txt|	Perl interface
 |if_pyth.txt|	Python interface
-|if_sniff.txt|	SNiFF+ interface
 |if_tcl.txt|	Tcl interface
 |if_ole.txt|	OLE automation interface for Win32
 |if_ruby.txt|	Ruby interface

runtime/doc/helphelp.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Sep 19
+*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -197,6 +197,9 @@ command: >
 				*E154* *E150* *E151* *E152* *E153* *E670*
 :helpt[ags] [++t] {dir}
 			Generate the help tags file(s) for directory {dir}.
+			When {dir} is ALL then all "doc" directories in
+			'runtimepath' will be used.
+
 			All "*.txt" and "*.??x" files in the directory and
 			sub-directories are scanned for a help tag definition
 			in between stars.  The "*.??x" files are for
@@ -205,9 +208,11 @@ command: >
 			sorted.
 			When there are duplicates an error message is given.
 			An existing tags file is silently overwritten.
+
 			The optional "++t" argument forces adding the
 			"help-tags" tag.  This is also done when the {dir} is
 			equal to $VIMRUNTIME/doc.
+
 			To rebuild the help tags in the runtime directory
 			(requires write permission there): >
 				:helptags $VIMRUNTIME/doc

runtime/doc/if_lua.txt

@@ -410,13 +410,20 @@ This means that Vim will search for the Lua DLL or shared library file only
 when needed.  When you don't use the Lua interface you don't need it, thus
 you can use Vim without this file.
 
-On MS-Windows to use the Lua interface the Lua DLL must be in your search path.
-In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The version
-of the DLL must match the Lua version Vim was compiled with.
 
-On Unix the 'luadll' option can be used to specify the Lua shared library file
-instead of DYNAMIC_LUA_DLL file what was specified at compile time.  The
-version of the shared library must match the Lua version Vim was compiled with.
+MS-Windows ~
+
+To use the Lua interface the Lua DLL must be in your search path.  In a
+console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The 'luadll'
+option can be also used to specify the Lua DLL.  The version of the DLL must
+match the Lua version Vim was compiled with.
+
+
+Unix ~
+
+The 'luadll' option can be used to specify the Lua shared library file instead
+of DYNAMIC_LUA_DLL file what was specified at compile time.  The version of
+the shared library must match the Lua version Vim was compiled with.
 
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/if_perl.txt

@@ -284,7 +284,8 @@ used for building Vim.
 To use the Perl interface the Perl DLL must be in your search path.
 If Vim reports it cannot find the perl512.dll, make sure your $PATH includes
 the directory where it is located.  The Perl installer normally does that.
-In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
+In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The
+'perldll' option can be also used to specify the Perl DLL.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Perl version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name is "perl512.dll".  That is for Perl 5.12.  To know for

runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt

@@ -686,18 +686,24 @@ This means that Vim will search for the Python DLL or shared library file only
 when needed.  When you don't use the Python interface you don't need it, thus
 you can use Vim without this file.
 
-On MS-Windows to use the Python interface the Python DLL must be in your search
-path.  In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
+
+MS-Windows ~
+
+To use the Python interface the Python DLL must be in your search path.  In a
+console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The 'pythondll'
+or 'pythonthreedll' option can be also used to specify the Python DLL.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Python version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name is "python24.dll".  That is for Python 2.4.  To know for
 sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "python\d*.dll\c".
 
-On Unix the 'pythondll' or 'pythonthreedll' option can be used to specify the
-Python shared library file instead of DYNAMIC_PYTHON_DLL or
-DYNAMIC_PYTHON3_DLL file what were specified at compile time.  The version of
-the shared library must match the Python 2.x or Python 3 version Vim was
-compiled with.
+
+Unix ~
+
+The 'pythondll' or 'pythonthreedll' option can be used to specify the Python
+shared library file instead of DYNAMIC_PYTHON_DLL or DYNAMIC_PYTHON3_DLL file
+what were specified at compile time.  The version of the shared library must
+match the Python 2.x or Python 3 version Vim was compiled with.
 
 ==============================================================================
 10. Python 3						*python3*

runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt

@@ -199,6 +199,7 @@ This means that Vim will search for the Ruby DLL file or shared library only
 when needed.  When you don't use the Ruby interface you don't need it, thus
 you can use Vim even though this library file is not on your system.
 
+
 MS-Windows ~
 
 You need to install the right version of Ruby for this to work.  You can find
@@ -207,7 +208,8 @@ http://www.garbagecollect.jp/ruby/mswin32/en/download/release.html
 Currently that is ruby-1.9.1-p429-i386-mswin32.zip
 
 To use the Ruby interface the Ruby DLL must be in your search path.  In a
-console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
+console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The 'rubydll'
+option can be also used to specify the Ruby DLL.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Ruby version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name is "msvcrt-ruby191.dll".  That is for Ruby 1.9.1.  To know
@@ -218,6 +220,7 @@ and comment-out the check for _MSC_VER.
 You may also need to rename the include directory name to match the version,
 strangely for Ruby 1.9.3 the directory is called 1.9.1.
 
+
 Unix ~
 
 The 'rubydll' option can be used to specify the Ruby shared library file

runtime/doc/if_sniff.txt

@@ -1,95 +1,11 @@
-*if_sniff.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*if_sniff.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL
 		by Anton Leherbauer (toni@takefive.co.at)
 
 
-SNiFF+ and Vim				    *sniff*
-
-1. Introduction				    |sniff-intro|
-2. Commands				    |sniff-commands|
-3. Compiling Vim with SNiFF+ interface	    |sniff-compiling|
-
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}  *E275* *E274* *E276* *E278* *E279*
-
-The SNiFF+ interface only works, when Vim was compiled with the |+sniff|
-feature.
-
-==============================================================================
-1. Introduction					*sniff-intro*
-
-The following features for the use with SNiFF+ are available:
-
-   * Vim can be used for all editing requests
-   * SNiFF+ recognizes and updates all browsers when a file is saved in Vim
-   * SNiFF+ commands can be issued directly from Vim
-
-How to use Vim with SNiFF+
-   1. Make sure SNiFF+ is running.
-   2. In the Editor view of the Preferences dialog set the Field named
-      'External Editor' to 'Emacs/Vim'.
-   4. Start Vim
-   5. Connect to SNiFF+ (:sniff connect)
-
-Once a connection is established, SNiFF+ uses Vim for all requests to show or
-edit source code.  On the other hand, you can send queries to SNiFF+ with the
-:sniff command.
-
-==============================================================================
-2. Commands				    *sniff-commands*
-
-			    *:sniff* *:sni*
-:sni[ff] request [symbol]   Send request to sniff with optional symbol.
-			    {not in Vi}
-:sni[ff]		    Display all possible requests and the connection
-			    status
-
-Most requests require a symbol (identifier) as parameter.  If it is omitted,
-Vim will use the current word under the cursor.
-The available requests are listed below:
-
-request		      mapping	description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-connect			sc	Establish connection with SNiFF+.
-				Make sure SNiFF+ is prepared for this in the
-				Preferences
-disconnect		sq	Disconnect from SNiFF+.  You can reconnect any
-				time with :sniff connect (or 'sc')
-toggle			st	Toggle between implementation
-				and definition file
-find-symbol		sf	Load the symbol into a Symbol Browser
-browse-class		sb	Loads the class into a Class Browser
-superclass		ss	Edit superclass of symbol
-overridden		so	Edit overridden method of symbol
-retrieve-file		srf	Retrieve symbol in current file
-retrieve-project	srp	Retrieve symbol in current project
-retrieve-all-projects	srP	Retrieve symbol in all projects
-retrieve-next		sR	Retrieve symbol using current Retriever
-				settings
-goto-symbol		sg	Goto definition or implementation of symbol
-hierarchy		sh	Load symbol into the Hierarchy Browser
-restr-hier		sH	same as above but show only related classes
-xref-to			sxt	Start a refers-to query on symbol and
-				load the results into the Cross Referencer
-xref-by			sxb	Start a referred-by query on symbol
-xref-has		sxh	Start a refers-to components query on symbol
-xref-used-by		sxu	Start a referred-by as component query on
-				symbol
-show-docu		sd	Show documentation of symbol
-gen-docu		sD	Generate documentation of symbol
-
-The mappings are defined in a file 'sniff.vim', which is part of every SNiFF+
-product ($SNIFF_DIR/config/sniff.vim).  This file is sourced whenever Vim
-connects to SNiFF+.
-
-==============================================================================
-3. Compiling Vim with SNiFF+ interface		*sniff-compiling*
-
-To compile Vim with SNiFF+ support, you need two source files of the extra
-archive: if_sniff.c and if_sniff.h.
-On Unix: Edit the Makefile and uncomment the line "--enable-sniff".  Or run
-configure manually with this argument.
-On NT: Specify SNIFF=yes with your make command.
+The SNiFF+ support was removed at patch 7.4.1433.  If you want to check it out
+sync to before that.
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt

@@ -526,7 +526,8 @@ can use Vim without this file.
 MS-Windows ~
 
 To use the Tcl interface the Tcl DLL must be in your search path.  In a
-console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
+console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The 'tcldll'
+option can be also used to specify the Tcl DLL.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Tcl version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name is "tcl86.dll".  That is for Tcl 8.6.  To know for sure

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 19
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 12
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1394,6 +1394,8 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:ounmap|	:ou[nmap]	like ":unmap" but for Operator-pending mode
 |:ounmenu|	:ounme[nu]	remove menu for Operator-pending mode
 |:ownsyntax|	:ow[nsyntax]	set new local syntax highlight for this window
+|:packadd|	:pa[ckadd]	add a plugin from 'packpath'
+|:packloadall|	:packl[oadall]	load all packages under 'packpath'
 |:pclose|	:pc[lose]	close preview window
 |:pedit|	:ped[it]	edit file in the preview window
 |:perl|		:pe[rl]		execute Perl command
@@ -1498,7 +1500,6 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:smile|	:smi[le]	make the user happy
 |:snext|	:sn[ext]	split window and go to next file in the
 				argument list
-|:sniff|	:sni[ff]	send request to sniff
 |:snomagic|	:sno[magic]	:substitute with 'nomagic'
 |:snoremap|	:snor[emap]	like ":noremap" but for Select mode
 |:snoremenu|	:snoreme[nu]	like ":noremenu" but for Select mode

runtime/doc/message.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Feb 23
+*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -476,8 +476,6 @@ in memory, you can reduce that with these options:
   helps for a change that affects all lines.
 - 'undoreload' Set to zero to disable.
 
-Also see |msdos-limitations|.
-
 							*E339*  >
   Pattern too long
 

runtime/doc/options.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 20
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ achieve special effects.  These options come in three forms:
 :se[t] {option}:{value}
 			Set string or number option to {value}.
 			For numeric options the value can be given in decimal,
- 			hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0').
+			hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0').
 			The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by
 			default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is
 			set).  See |cmdline-completion|.
@@ -1002,7 +1002,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	- The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
 	  where this is possible.  The directory must exist, Vim will not
 	  create it for you.
-	- Empty means that no backup file will be created ( 'patchmode' is
+	- Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
 	  impossible!).  Writing may fail because of this.
 	- A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
 	  as the edited file.
@@ -1211,10 +1211,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'bioskey' 'biosk'	boolean	(default on)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}  {only for MS-DOS}
-	When on the BIOS is called to obtain a keyboard character.  This works
-	better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console.  When using a
-	terminal over a serial port reset this option.
-	Also see |'conskey'|.
+	This was for MS-DOS and is no longer supported.
 
 							*'bomb'* *'nobomb'*
 'bomb'			boolean	(default off)
@@ -1795,7 +1792,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used.  It is also used for whole-line
 	completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|.  It indicates the type of completion
 	and the places to scan.  It is a comma separated list of flags:
-	.	scan the current buffer ( 'wrapscan' is ignored)
+	.	scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
 	w	scan buffers from other windows
 	b	scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
 	u	scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
@@ -1946,13 +1943,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'conskey' 'consk'	boolean	(default off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}  {only for MS-DOS}
-	When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character.
-	This should work in most cases.  Also see |'bioskey'|.  Together,
-	three methods of console input are available:
-	'conskey'   'bioskey'	    action ~
-	   on	     on or off	    direct console input
-	   off		on	    BIOS
-	   off		off	    STDIN
+	This was for MS-DOS and is no longer supported.
 
 			*'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'*
 'copyindent' 'ci'	boolean	(default off)
@@ -2301,6 +2292,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			different.  The whole undo file is encrypted, not just
 			the pieces of text.
 
+	You should use "blowfish2", also to re-encrypt older files.
+
 	When reading an encrypted file 'cryptmethod' will be set automatically
 	to the detected method of the file being read.  Thus if you write it
 	without changing 'cryptmethod' the same method will be used.
@@ -2653,6 +2646,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	also 'gdefault' option.
 	Switching this option on is discouraged!
 
+						*'emoji'* *'emo'*
+'emoji' 'emo'	boolean (default: on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature}
+	When on all Unicode emoji characters are considered to be full width.
+
+
 					*'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543*
 'encoding' 'enc'	string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG)
 			global
@@ -3030,8 +3032,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  file only, the option is not changed.
 	When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.
 
-	Note that when Vim starts up with an empty buffer this option is not
-	used.  Set 'fileformat' in your .vimrc instead.
+	When Vim starts up with an empty buffer the first item is used.  You
+	can overrule this by setting 'fileformat' in your .vimrc.
 
 	For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
 	are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
@@ -3741,7 +3743,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		The same applies to the modeless selection.
 								*'go-P'*
 	  'P'	Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "*
-	  	register.
+		register.
 								*'go-A'*
 	  'A'	Autoselect for the modeless selection.  Like 'a', but only
 		applies to the modeless selection.
@@ -4850,7 +4852,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
 
 						*'luadll'*
-'luadll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+'luadll'		string	(default depends on the build)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+lua/dyn|
@@ -5115,6 +5117,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   written.  A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
 	   values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
 	   reset.
+	   Similarly for 'eol' and 'bomb'.
 	This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the
 	result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost,
 	FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event.  See |gzip-example| for
@@ -5307,7 +5310,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
 	alpha	If included, single alphabetical characters will be
 		incremented or decremented.  This is useful for a list with a
-		letter index a), b), etc.	  	*octal-nrformats*
+		letter index a), b), etc.		*octal-nrformats*
 	octal	If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
 		to be octal.  Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
 	hex	If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
@@ -5337,7 +5340,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	relative to the cursor.  Together with 'number' there are these
 	four combinations (cursor in line 3):
 
-              	'nonu'          'nu'            'nonu'          'nu'
+		'nonu'          'nu'            'nonu'          'nu'
 		'nornu'         'nornu'         'rnu'           'rnu'
 
 	    |apple          |  1 apple      |  2 apple      |  2 apple
@@ -5409,6 +5412,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	This option was supported on RISC OS, which has been removed.
 
 
+				*'packpath'* *'pp'*
+'packpath' 'pp'		string	(default: see 'runtimepath')
+			{not in Vi}
+	Directories used to find packages.  See |packages|.
+
+
 						*'paragraphs'* *'para'*
 'paragraphs' 'para'	string	(default "IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp")
 			global
@@ -5570,7 +5579,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
 
 						*'perldll'*
-'perldll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+'perldll'		string	(default depends on the build)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+perl/dyn|
@@ -5707,7 +5716,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|ins-completion-menu|.
 
 						*'pythondll'*
-'pythondll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+'pythondll'		string	(default depends on the build)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+python/dyn|
@@ -5948,7 +5957,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
 
 						*'rubydll'*
-'rubydll' 		string	(default: depends on the build)
+'rubydll'		string	(default: depends on the build)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+ruby/dyn|
@@ -6536,7 +6545,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  c	don't give |ins-completion-menu| messages.  For example,
 		"-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only match",
 		"Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc.
-	  q     use "recording" instead of "recording @a"
+	  q	use "recording" instead of "recording @a"
+	  F	don't give the file info when editing a file, like `:silent`
+		was used for the command
 
 	This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
 	requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
@@ -7440,7 +7451,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	mapping which should not change the tagstack.
 
 						*'tcldll'*
-'tcldll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+'tcldll'		string	(default depends on the build)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+tcl/dyn|
@@ -7495,7 +7506,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Encoding used for the terminal.  This specifies what character
 	encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand.  For
-	the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ( 'encoding' is used for the
+	the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the
 	display).  Except for the Mac when 'macatsui' is off, then
 	'termencoding' should be "macroman".
 								*E617*
@@ -7772,13 +7783,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 				{not in Vi}
 				{only in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
 	Controls the size of toolbar icons.  The possible values are:
-		tiny		Use tiny toolbar icons.
-		small		Use small toolbar icons (default).
-		medium		Use medium-sized toolbar icons.
-		large		Use large toolbar icons.
+		tiny		Use tiny icons.
+		small		Use small icons (default).
+		medium		Use medium-sized icons.
+		large		Use large icons.
+		huge		Use even larger icons.
+		giant		Use very big icons.
 	The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on
-	the current theme.  Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24,
-	small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.
+	the current theme.  Common dimensions are giant=48x48, huge=32x32,
+	large=24x24, medium=24x24, small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.
 
 	If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined
 	by user preferences or the current theme is used.

runtime/doc/os_390.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_390.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2010 May 30
+*os_390.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Ralf Schandl
@@ -108,7 +108,6 @@ Never tested:
     - Langmap			(|'langmap'|)
     - Python support		(|Python|)
     - Right-to-left mode	(|'rightleft'|)
-    - SNiFF+ interface		(|sniff|)
     - TCL interface		(|tcl|)
     ...
 

runtime/doc/os_msdos.txt

@@ -1,276 +1,15 @@
-*os_msdos.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*os_msdos.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
 
 
 					*msdos* *ms-dos* *MSDOS* *MS-DOS*
-This file contains the particularities for the MS-DOS version of Vim.
+This file used to contain the particularities for the MS-DOS version of Vim.
+MS-DOS support was removed in patch 7.4.1399.  If you want to use it you will
+need to get a version older than that.  Note that the MS-DOS version doesn't
+work, there is not enough memory.  The DOS32 version (using DJGPP) might still
+work on older systems.
 
-1. Two versions for MS-DOS	|msdos-versions|
-2. Known problems		|msdos-problems|
-3. Long file names		|msdos-longfname|
-4. Termcap codes		|msdos-termcap|
-5. Shifted arrow keys		|msdos-arrows|
-6. Filename extensions		|msdos-fname-extensions|
-7. Memory usage and limitations	|msdos-limitations|
-8. Symbolically linked files	|msdos-linked-files|
-9. Copy/paste in a dos box	|msdos-copy-paste|
-
-Additionally, there are a number of common Win32 and DOS items:
-File locations			|dos-locations|
-Using backslashes		|dos-backslash|
-Standard mappings		|dos-standard-mappings|
-Screen output and colors	|dos-colors|
-File formats			|dos-file-formats|
-:cd command			|dos-:cd|
-Interrupting			|dos-CTRL-Break|
-Temp files			|dos-temp-files|
-Shell option default		|dos-shell|
-
-For compiling Vim see src/INSTALL.pc.			*msdos-compiling*
-
-==============================================================================
-1. Two versions for MS-DOS				*msdos-versions*
-
-There are two versions of Vim that can be used with MS-DOS machines:
-
-							*dos16*
-Dos16 version	Can be used on any MS-DOS system, only uses up to 640 Kbyte of
-		memory.  Also runs on OS/2, Windows 95, and NT.  Excludes some
-		Vim-specific features (autocommands, syntax highlighting,
-		etc.).  Recommended for use on pre-386 machines.
-							*dos32*
-Dos32 version	Requires 386 processor and a |DPMI| driver, uses all
-		available memory.  Supports long file names and the Windows
-		clipboard, but NOT on Windows NT.  Recommended for MS-DOS,
-		Windows 3.1 and Windows 95.
-
-There are also two versions that run under Windows:
-Win32 version   Requires Windows 95 or Windows NT, uses all available
-		memory, supports long file names, etc.  Has some problems on
-		Windows 95.  Recommended for Windows NT.  See |os_win32.txt|
-Win32 GUI	Requirements like the Win32 version, but runs in its own
-		window, instead of a console.  Has scrollbars, menu, etc.
-		Recommended for Windows 95 and Windows NT.  See |gui-w32|.
-
-It is recommended to use the Dos32 or Win32 version.  Although the Dos16
-version is able to edit very big files, it quickly runs out of memory when
-making big changes.  Disabling undo helps: ":set ul=-1".  The screen updating
-of the Dos16 version is the fastest of the three on DOS or Windows 95; on
-Windows NT, the Win32 version is just as fast.
-
-								*DPMI*
-For the Dos32 version, you may need a DPMI driver when running in MS-DOS.  If
-you are running Windows or installed a clever memory manager, it will probably
-work already.  If you get the message "No DPMI", you need to install a DPMI
-driver.  Such a driver is included with the executable in CSDPMI4B.ZIP.  Run
-"cwsdpmi" just before starting Vim each time.  Or you might want to include
-"cwsdpmi -p" in your autoexec.bat to make it resident.  The latest version of
-"CSDPMI*.ZIP" can be obtained from: "ftp.neosoft.com:pub/users/s/sandmann".
-
-							*minimal-features*
-The 16 bit DOS version has been compiled with minimal features.  Check the
-|+feature-list| which ones are included (marked with a "T").
-You can include more features by editing feature.h and recompiling.
-
-==============================================================================
-2. Known problems					*msdos-problems*
-
-When using smartdrive (MS-DOS 6.x) with write-behind caching, it is possible
-that Vim will try to create a swap file on a read-only file system (e.g.
-write protected floppy).  You will then be given the message >
-	A serious disk error has occurred .., Retry (r)?
-There is nothing you can do but unprotect the floppy or switch off the
-computer.  Even CTRL-ALT-DEL will not get you out of this.  This is really a
-problem of smartdrive, not Vim.  Smartdrive works fine otherwise.  If this
-bothers you, don't use the write-behind caching.
-
-Vim can't read swap files that have been opened already, unless the "share"
-command has been used.  If you see stray warnings for existing swap files,
-include the "share" command in your config.sys or autoexec.bat (see your MSDOS
-documentation).
-
-The Dos16 version can only have about 10 files open (in a window or hidden) at
-one time.  With more files you will get error messages when trying to read or
-write a file, and for filter commands.  Or Vim runs out of memory, and random
-problems may result.
-
-The Dos32 version cannot have an unlimited number of files open at any one
-time.  The limit depends on the setting of FILES in your CONFIG.SYS.  This
-defaults to 15; if you need to edit a lot of files, you should increase this.
-If you do not set FILES high enough, you can get strange errors, and shell
-commands may cause a crash!
-
-The Dos32 version can work with long file names.  When doing file name
-completion, matches for the short file name will also be found.  But this will
-result in the corresponding long file name.  For example, if you have the long
-file name "this_is_a_test" with the short file name "this_i~1", the command
-":e *1" will start editing "this_is_a_test".
-
-When using the Dos32 version and you run into problems with DPMI support,
-check if there is a program in your config.sys that eats resources.  One
-program known to cause this problem is "netx", which says "NetWare v. 3.26
-Workstation shell".  Replace it with version 3.32 to fix the problem.
-
-The Dos32 version will parse its arguments to handle quotation.  This is good
-to edit a file with spaces in its name, for example: >
-	vim "program files\accessories\ppp.scp"
-A side effect is that single quotes are removed.  Insert a backslash to avoid
-that.  For example, to edit the file "fi'le.txt": >
-	vim fi\'le.txt
-
-==============================================================================
-3. Long file names					*msdos-longfname*
-
-If the Dos32 version is run on Windows 95, it can use long file names.  It
-will work by default.  If you want to disable this, use this setting:
-	set LFN=N
-You can put this in your autoexec.bat file.
-
-Note: If you have installed DJGPP on your machine, you probably have a
-"djgpp.env" file, which contains "LFN=n".  You need to use "LFN=Y" to switch
-on using long file names then.
-
-==============================================================================
-4. Termcap codes					*msdos-termcap*
-
-If you want to use another output method (e.g., when using a terminal on a COM
-port), set the terminal name to "pcansi".  You can change the termcap options
-when needed (see |terminal-options|).  Note that the
-normal IBM ansi.sys does not support all the codes of the builtin pcansi
-terminal.  If you use ansi.sys, you will need to delete the termcap entries
-t_al and t_dl with >
-   :set t_al= t_dl=
-Otherwise, the screen will not be updated correctly.  It is better to use
-nansi.sys, nnansi.sys, or the like instead of ansi.sys.
-
-If you want to use Vim on a terminal connected to a COM: port, reset the
-'bioskey' option.  Otherwise the commands will be read from the PC keyboard.
-CTRL-C and CTRL-P may not work correctly with 'bioskey' reset.
-
-==============================================================================
-5. Shifted arrow keys					*msdos-arrows*
-
-Use CTRL-arrow-left and CTRL-arrow-right instead of SHIFT-arrow-left and
-SHIFT-arrow-right.  The arrow-up and arrow-down cannot be used with SHIFT or
-CTRL.
-
-==============================================================================
-6. Filename extensions				*msdos-fname-extensions*
-
-MS-DOS allows for only one file name extension.  Therefore, when appending an
-extension, the '.' in the original file name is replaced with a '_', the name
-is truncated to 8 characters, and the new extension (e.g., ".swp") is
-appended.  Two examples: "test.c" becomes "test_c.bak", "thisisat.est"
-becomes "thisisat.bak".  To reduce these problems, the default for
-'backupext' is "~" instead of ".bak".  The backup file for "thisisat.est"
-then becomes "thisisat.es~".  The 'shortname' option is not available,
-because it would always be set.
-
-==============================================================================
-7. Memory usage and limitations			*msdos-limitations*
-
-A swap file is used to store most of the text.  You should be able to edit
-very large files.  However, memory is used for undo and other things.  If you
-delete a lot of text, you can still run out of memory in the Dos16 version.
-
-If Vim gives an "Out of memory" warning, you should stop editing.  The result
-of further editing actions is unpredictable.  Setting 'undolevels' to 0 saves
-some memory.  Running the maze macros on a big maze is guaranteed to run out
-of memory, because each change is remembered for undo.  In this case set
-'undolevels' to a negative number.  This will switch off undo completely.
-
-						*msdos-clipboard-limits*
-In the Dos32 version, extended memory is used to avoid these problems.
-However, if you are using the clipboard, you can still run into memory
-limitations because the Windows clipboard can only communicate with Vim using
-Dos memory.  This means that the largest amount of text that can be sent to
-or received from the Windows clipboard is limited by how much free Dos memory
-is available on your system.
-
-You can usually maximize the amount of available Dos memory by adding the
-following lines to Dos's "config.sys" file: >
-
-	DOS=HIGH,UMB
-	DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\himem.sys
-	DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\emm386.exe RAM
-
-Modifying config.sys in this way will also help to make more memory available
-for the Dos16 version, if you are using that.
-
-In the Dos16 version the line length is limited to about 32000 characters.
-When reading a file the lines are automatically split.  But editing a line
-in such a way that it becomes too long may give unexpected results.
-
-==============================================================================
-8. Symbolically linked files			*msdos-linked-files*
-
-When using Vim to edit a symbolically linked file on a unix NFS file server,
-you may run into problems.  When writing the file, Vim does not "write
-through" the symlink.  Instead, it deletes the symbolic link and creates a new
-file in its place.
-
-On Unix, Vim is prepared for links (symbolic or hard).  A backup copy of the
-original file is made and then the original file is overwritten.  This assures
-that all properties of the file remain the same.  On non-Unix systems, the
-original file is renamed and a new file is written.  Only the protection bits
-are set like the original file.  However, this doesn't work properly when
-working on an NFS-mounted file system where links and other things exist.  The
-only way to fix this in the current version is not making a backup file, by
-":set nobackup nowritebackup"	|'writebackup'|
-
-A similar problem occurs when mounting a Unix filesystem through Samba or a
-similar system.  When Vim creates a new file it will get the default user ID
-for the mounted file system.  This may be different from the original user ID.
-To avoid this set the 'backupcopy' option to "yes".
-
-==============================================================================
-9. Copy/paste in a dos box			*msdos-copy-paste*
-
-					*E450* *E451* *E452* *E453* *E454*
-The 32 bit version can copy/paste from/to the Windows clipboard directly.  Use
-the "* register.  Large amounts of text can be copied this way, but it must be
-possible to allocate memory for it, see |msdos-clipboard-limits|.  When moving
-text from one Vim to another, the type of the selection
-(characterwise/linewise/blockwise) is passed on.
-
-In other versions, the following can be used.
-
-(posted to comp.editors by John Velman <velman@igate1.hac.com>)
-
-How to copy/paste text from/to vim in a dos box:
-
-1) To get VIM to run in a window, instead of full screen, press alt+enter.
-   This toggles back and forth between full screen and a dos window.
-   NOTE: In Windows 95 you must have the property "Fast Pasting" unchecked!
-   In the properties dialog box for the MS-DOS window, go to "MS-DOS
-   Prompt/Misc/Fast pasting" and make sure that it is NOT checked.
-   To make this permanent, change the properties for
-   "\windows\system\conagent.exe" (from Philip Nelson, unverified).
-
-2) To paste something _into_ Vim, put Vim in insert mode.
-
-3) Put the text you want to paste on the windows clipboard.
-
-4) Click the control box in the upper left of the Vim window.  (This looks
-   like a big minus sign.)  If you don't want to use the mouse, you can get
-   this with alt+spacebar.
-5) On the resulting dropdown menu choose "Edit".
-6) On the child dropdown menu choose "Paste".
-
-To copy something from the Vim window to the clipboard,
-
-1) Select the control box to get the control drop down menu.
-2) Select "Edit".
-3) Select "Mark".
-4) Using either the keys or the mouse, select the part of the Vim window that
-   you want to copy.  To use the keys, use the arrow keys, and hold down shift
-   to extend the selection.
-5) When you've completed your selection, press 'enter'.  The selection
-   is now in the windows clipboard.  By the way, this can be any
-   rectangular selection, for example columns 4-25 in rows 7-10.  It can
-   include anything in the VIM window: the output of a :!dir, for
-   example.
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/os_win32.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_win32.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Sep 25
+*os_win32.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by George Reilly
@@ -96,6 +96,31 @@ The directory of the Vim executable is appended to $PATH.  This is mostly to
 make "!xxd" work, as it is in the Tools menu.  And it also means that when
 executable() returns 1 the executable can actually be executed.
 
+Quotes in file names					*win32-quotes*
+
+Quotes inside a file name (or any other command line argument) can be escaped
+with a backslash.  E.g. >
+	vim -c "echo 'foo\"bar'"
+
+Alternatively use three quotes to get one: >
+	vim -c "echo 'foo"""bar'"
+
+The quotation rules are:
+
+1. A `"` starts quotation.
+2. Another `"` or `""` ends quotation. If the quotation ends with `""`, a `"`
+   is produced at the end of the quoted string.
+
+Examples, with [] around an argument:
+        "foo"           -> [foo]
+        "foo""          -> [foo"]
+        "foo"bar        -> [foobar]
+        "foo" bar       -> [foo], [bar]
+        "foo""bar       -> [foo"bar]
+        "foo"" bar      -> [foo"], [bar]
+        "foo"""bar"     -> [foo"bar]
+
+
 ==============================================================================
 3. Restore screen contents				*win32-restore*
 

runtime/doc/quickfix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 21
+*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 23
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -56,6 +56,14 @@ The following quickfix commands can be used.  The location list commands are
 similar to the quickfix commands, replacing the 'c' prefix in the quickfix
 command with 'l'.
 
+							*E924*
+If the current window was closed by an |autocommand| while processing a
+location list command, it will be aborted.
+
+							*E925* *E926*
+If the current quickfix or location list was changed by an |autocommand| while
+processing a quickfix or location list command, it will be aborted.
+
 							*:cc*
 :cc[!] [nr]		Display error [nr].  If [nr] is omitted, the same
 			error is displayed again.  Without [!] this doesn't

runtime/doc/quickref.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Nov 10
+*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -810,7 +810,8 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'omnifunc'	  'ofu'     function for filetype-specific completion
 'opendevice'	  'odev'    allow reading/writing devices on MS-Windows
 'operatorfunc'	  'opfunc'  function to be called for |g@| operator
-'osfiletype' 	  'oft'     no longer supported
+'osfiletype'	  'oft'     no longer supported
+'packpath'	  'pp'      list of directories used for packages
 'paragraphs'	  'para'    nroff macros that separate paragraphs
 'paste'			    allow pasting text
 'pastetoggle'	  'pt'	    key code that causes 'paste' to toggle

runtime/doc/repeat.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 12
+*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -8,12 +8,14 @@ Repeating commands, Vim scripts and debugging			*repeating*
 
 Chapter 26 of the user manual introduces repeating |usr_26.txt|.
 
-1. Single repeats	|single-repeat|
-2. Multiple repeats	|multi-repeat|
-3. Complex repeats	|complex-repeat|
-4. Using Vim scripts	|using-scripts|
-5. Debugging scripts	|debug-scripts|
-6. Profiling		|profiling|
+1. Single repeats		|single-repeat|
+2. Multiple repeats		|multi-repeat|
+3. Complex repeats		|complex-repeat|
+4. Using Vim scripts		|using-scripts|
+5. Using Vim packages		|packages|
+6. Creating Vim packages	|package-create|
+7. Debugging scripts		|debug-scripts|
+8. Profiling			|profiling|
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Single repeats					*single-repeat*
@@ -181,10 +183,12 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ru* *:runtime*
-:ru[ntime][!] {file} ..
+:ru[ntime][!] [where] {file} ..
 			Read Ex commands from {file} in each directory given
-			by 'runtimepath'.  There is no error for non-existing
-			files.  Example: >
+			by 'runtimepath' and/or 'packpath'.  There is no error
+			for non-existing files.
+			
+			Example: >
 				:runtime syntax/c.vim
 
 <			There can be multiple {file} arguments, separated by
@@ -198,6 +202,15 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			When it is not included only the first found file is
 			sourced.
 
+			When [where] is omitted only 'runtimepath' is used.
+			Other values:
+				START	search under "start" in 'packpath'
+				OPT 	search under "opt" in 'packpath'
+				PACK	search under "start" and "opt" in
+					'packpath'
+				ALL	first use 'runtimepath', then search
+					under "start" and "opt" in 'packpath'
+
 			When {file} contains wildcards it is expanded to all
 			matching files.  Example: >
 				:runtime! plugin/*.vim
@@ -212,6 +225,45 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			about each searched file.
 			{not in Vi}
 
+							*:pa* *:packadd* *E919*
+:pa[ckadd][!] {name}	Search for an optional plugin directory in 'packpath'
+			and source any plugin files found.  The directory must
+			match:
+				pack/*/opt/{name} ~
+			The directory is added to 'runtimepath' if it wasn't
+			there yet.
+
+			Note that {name} is the directory name, not the name
+			of the .vim file.  If the "{name}/plugin" directory
+			contains more than one file they are all sourced.
+
+			If the filetype detection was not enabled yet (this
+			is usually done with a "syntax enable" or "filetype
+			on" command in your .vimrc file), this will also look
+			for "{name}/ftdetect/*.vim" files.
+
+			When the optional ! is added no plugin files or
+			ftdetect scripts are loaded, only the matching
+			directories are added to 'runtimepath'.  This is
+			useful in your .vimrc.  The plugins will then be
+			loaded during initialization, see |load-plugins|.
+
+			Also see |pack-add|.
+
+						*:packl* *:packloadall*
+:packloadall[!]		Load all packages in the "start" directories under
+			'packpath'.  The directories found are added to
+			'runtimepath'.
+			This is normally done automatically during startup,
+			after loading your .vimrc file.  With this command it
+			can be done earlier.
+			Packages will be loaded only once.  After this command
+			it won't happen again.  When the optional ! is added
+			this command will load packages even when done before.
+			An Error only causes sourcing the script where it
+			happens to be aborted, further plugins will be loaded.
+			See |packages|.
+
 :scripte[ncoding] [encoding]		*:scripte* *:scriptencoding* *E167*
 			Specify the character encoding used in the script.
 			The following lines will be converted from [encoding]
@@ -388,7 +440,167 @@ Rationale:
 <	Therefore the unusual leading backslash is used.
 
 ==============================================================================
-5. Debugging scripts					*debug-scripts*
+5. Using Vim packages					*packages*
+
+A Vim package is a directory that contains one or more plugins.  The
+advantages over normal plugins:
+- A package can be downloaded as an archive and unpacked in its own directory.
+  Thus the files are not mixed with files of other plugins.  That makes it
+  easy to update and remove.
+- A package can be a git, mercurial, etc. repository.  That makes it really
+  easy to update.
+- A package can contain multiple plugins that depend on each other.
+- A package can contain plugins that are automatically loaded on startup and
+  ones that are only loaded when needed with `:packadd`.
+
+
+Using a package and loading automatically ~
+
+Let's assume your Vim files are in the "~/.vim" directory and you want to add a
+package from a zip archive "/tmp/foopack.zip":
+	% mkdir -p ~/.vim/pack/foo
+	% cd ~/.vim/pack/foo
+	% unzip /tmp/foopack.zip
+
+The directory name "foo" is arbitrary, you can pick anything you like.
+
+You would now have these files under ~/.vim:
+	pack/foo/README.txt
+	pack/foo/start/foobar/plugin/foo.vim
+	pack/foo/start/foobar/syntax/some.vim
+	pack/foo/opt/foodebug/plugin/debugger.vim
+
+When Vim starts up, after processing your .vimrc, it scans all directories in
+'packpath' for plugins under the "pack/*/start" directory and loads them.  The
+directory is added to 'runtimepath'.
+
+In the example Vim will find "pack/foo/start/foobar/plugin/foo.vim" and adds 
+"~/.vim/pack/foo/start/foobar" to 'runtimepath'.
+
+If the "foobar" plugin kicks in and sets the 'filetype' to "some", Vim will
+find the syntax/some.vim file, because its directory is in 'runtimepath'.
+
+Vim will also load ftdetect files, if there are any.
+
+Note that the files under "pack/foo/opt" are not loaded automatically, only the
+ones under "pack/foo/start".  See |pack-add| below for how the "opt" directory
+is used.
+
+Loading packages automatically will not happen if loading plugins is disabled,
+see |load-plugins|.
+
+To load packages earlier, so that 'runtimepath' gets updated: >
+	:packloadall
+This also works when loading plugins is disabled.  The automatic loading will
+only happen once.
+
+
+Using a single plugin and loading it automatically ~
+
+If you don't have a package but a single plugin, you need to create the extra
+directory level:
+	% mkdir -p ~/.vim/pack/foo/start/foobar
+	% cd ~/.vim/pack/foo/start/foobar
+	% unzip /tmp/someplugin.zip
+
+You would now have these files:
+	pack/foo/start/foobar/plugin/foo.vim
+	pack/foo/start/foobar/syntax/some.vim
+
+From here it works like above.
+
+
+Optional plugins ~
+							*pack-add*
+To load an optional plugin from a pack use the `:packadd` command: >
+	:packadd foodebug
+This searches for "pack/*/opt/foodebug" in 'packpath' and will find
+~/.vim/pack/foo/opt/foodebug/plugin/debugger.vim and source it.
+
+This could be done if some conditions are met.  For example, depending on
+whether Vim supports a feature or a dependency is missing.
+
+You can also load an optional plugin at startup, by putting this command in
+your |.vimrc|: >
+	:packadd! foodebug
+The extra "!" is so that the plugin isn't loaded with Vim was started with
+|--noplugin|.
+
+It is perfectly normal for a package to only have files in the "opt"
+directory.  You then need to load each plugin when you want to use it.
+
+
+Where to put what ~
+
+Since color schemes, loaded with `:colorscheme`, are found below
+"pack/*/start" and "pack/*/opt", you could put them anywhere.  We recommend
+you put them below "pack/*/opt", for example
+".vim/pack/mycolors/opt/dark/colors/very_dark.vim".
+
+Filetype plugins should go under "pack/*/start", so that they are always
+found.  Unless you have more than one plugin for a file type and want to
+select which one to load with `:packadd`.  E.g. depending on the compiler
+version: >
+	if foo_compiler_version > 34
+	  packadd foo_new
+	else
+	  packadd foo_old
+	endif
+
+The "after" directory is most likely not useful in a package.  It's not
+disallowed though.
+
+==============================================================================
+6. Creating Vim packages				*package-create*
+
+This assumes you write one or more plugins that you distribute as a package.
+
+If you have two unrelated plugins you would use two packages, so that Vim
+users can chose what they include or not.  Or you can decide to use one
+package with optional plugins, and tell the user to add the ones he wants with
+`:packadd`.
+
+Decide how you want to distribute the package.  You can create an archive or
+you could use a repository.  An archive can be used by more users, but is a
+bit harder to update to a new version.  A repository can usually be kept
+up-to-date easily, but it requires a program like "git" to be available.
+You can do both, github can automatically create an archive for a release.
+
+Your directory layout would be like this:
+   start/foobar/plugin/foo.vim    	" always loaded, defines commands
+   start/foobar/plugin/bar.vim    	" always loaded, defines commands
+   start/foobar/autoload/foo.vim  	" loaded when foo command used
+   start/foobar/doc/foo.txt       	" help for foo.vim
+   start/foobar/doc/tags          	" help tags
+   opt/fooextra/plugin/extra.vim  	" optional plugin, defines commands
+   opt/fooextra/autoload/extra.vim  	" loaded when extra command used
+   opt/fooextra/doc/extra.txt  	        " help for extra.vim
+   opt/fooextra/doc/tags  	        " help tags
+
+This allows for the user to do: >
+	mkdir ~/.vim/pack/myfoobar
+	cd ~/.vim/pack/myfoobar
+	git clone https://github.com/you/foobar.git
+
+Here "myfoobar" is a name that the user can choose, the only condition is that
+it differs from other packages.
+
+In your documentation you explain what the plugins do, and tell the user how
+to load the optional plugin: >
+	:packadd! fooextra
+
+You could add this packadd command in one of your plugins, to be executed when
+the optional plugin is needed.
+
+Run the `:helptags` command to generate the doc/tags file.  Including this
+generated file in the package means that the user can drop the package in his
+pack directory and the help command works right away.  Don't forget to re-run
+the command after changing the plugin help: >
+	:helptags path/start/foobar/doc
+	:helptags path/opt/fooextra/doc
+
+==============================================================================
+7. Debugging scripts					*debug-scripts*
 
 Besides the obvious messages that you can add to your scripts to find out what
 they are doing, Vim offers a debug mode.  This allows you to step through a
@@ -500,7 +712,7 @@ Additionally, these commands can be used:
 About the additional commands in debug mode:
 - There is no command-line completion for them, you get the completion for the
   normal Ex commands only.
-- You can shorten them, up to a single character, unless more then one command
+- You can shorten them, up to a single character, unless more than one command
   starts with the same letter.  "f" stands for "finish", use "fr" for "frame".
 - Hitting <CR> will repeat the previous one.  When doing another command, this
   is reset (because it's not clear what you want to repeat).
@@ -613,7 +825,7 @@ OBSCURE
 		user, don't use typeahead for debug commands.
 
 ==============================================================================
-6. Profiling						*profile* *profiling*
+8. Profiling						*profile* *profiling*
 
 Profiling means that Vim measures the time that is spent on executing
 functions and/or scripts.  The |+profile| feature is required for this.

runtime/doc/starting.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 18
+*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -45,6 +45,7 @@ filename	One or more file names.  The first one will be the current
 			vim -- -filename
 <		All arguments after the "--" will be interpreted as file names,
 		no other options or "+command" argument can follow.
+		For behavior of quotes on MS-Windows, see |win32-quotes|.
 
 							*--*
 -		This argument can mean two things, depending on whether Ex
@@ -414,6 +415,11 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		not needed, because Vim will be able to find out what type
 		of terminal you are using.  (See |terminal-info|.)  {not in Vi}
 
+							*--not-a-term*
+--not-a-term	Tells Vim that the user knows that the input and/or output is
+		not connected to a terminal.  This will avoid the warning and
+		the two second delay that would happen. {not in Vi}
+
 							*-d*
 -d		Start in diff mode, like |vimdiff|.
 		{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
@@ -827,6 +833,8 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
 	-  The user exrc file(s).  Same as for the user vimrc file, but with
 	   "vimrc" replaced by "exrc".  But only one of ".exrc" and "_exrc" is
 	   used, depending on the system.  And without the (*)!
+	-  You would usually have "syntax on" and/or "filetype on" commands,
+	   which trigger initializing filetype detection, see |syntax-loading|.
 
      d. If the 'exrc' option is on (which is not the default), the current
 	directory is searched for three files.  The first that exists is used,
@@ -857,6 +865,10 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
 	commands from the command line have not been executed yet.  You can
 	use "--cmd 'set noloadplugins'" |--cmd|.
 
+	Plugin packs are loaded.  These are plugins, as above, but found in
+	'packpath' "start" directories.  Every plugin directory found is added
+	in 'runtimepath'.  See |packages|.
+
 5. Set 'shellpipe' and 'shellredir'
 	The 'shellpipe' and 'shellredir' options are set according to the
 	value of the 'shell' option, unless they have been set before.
@@ -893,8 +905,9 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
 12. Execute startup commands
 	If a "-t" flag was given to Vim, the tag is jumped to.
 	The commands given with the |-c| and |+cmd| arguments are executed.
-	The starting flag is reset, has("vim_starting") will now return zero.
 	If the 'insertmode' option is set, Insert mode is entered.
+	The starting flag is reset, has("vim_starting") will now return zero.
+	The |v:vim_did_enter| variable is set to 1.
 	The |VimEnter| autocommands are executed.
 
 Some hints on using initializations:
@@ -1144,7 +1157,7 @@ There are several ways to exit Vim:
 - Use `:cquit`.  Also when there are changes.
 
 When using `:cquit` or when there was an error message Vim exits with exit
-code 1.  Errors can be avoide by using `:silent!`.
+code 1.  Errors can be avoided by using `:silent!`.
 
 ==============================================================================
 8. Saving settings					*save-settings*

runtime/doc/syntax.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 28
+*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 12
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -2890,7 +2890,7 @@ You may wish to embed languages into sh.  I'll give an example courtesy of
 Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
 file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
 
-    " AWK Embedding: {{{1
+    " AWK Embedding:
     " ==============
     " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
     if exists("b:current_syntax")
@@ -3361,6 +3361,13 @@ Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
 only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only 
 difference defined in the syntax file.
 
+
+ZSH						    *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
+
+The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
+
+	:let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
+
 ==============================================================================
 5. Defining a syntax					*:syn-define* *E410*
 
@@ -4527,9 +4534,9 @@ in their own color.
 :colo[rscheme] {name}	Load color scheme {name}.  This searches 'runtimepath'
 			for the file "colors/{name}.vim".  The first one that
 			is found is loaded.
-			To see the name of the currently active color scheme: >
-				:colo
-<			The name is also stored in the g:colors_name variable.
+			Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
+			"start" and then under "opt".
+
 			Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
 			":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
 			After the color scheme has been loaded the

runtime/doc/tags

@@ -207,6 +207,8 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'efm'	options.txt	/*'efm'*
 'ei'	options.txt	/*'ei'*
 'ek'	options.txt	/*'ek'*
+'emo'	options.txt	/*'emo'*
+'emoji'	options.txt	/*'emoji'*
 'enc'	options.txt	/*'enc'*
 'encoding'	options.txt	/*'encoding'*
 'endofline'	options.txt	/*'endofline'*
@@ -726,6 +728,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'option'	intro.txt	/*'option'*
 'osfiletype'	options.txt	/*'osfiletype'*
 'pa'	options.txt	/*'pa'*
+'packpath'	options.txt	/*'packpath'*
 'para'	options.txt	/*'para'*
 'paragraphs'	options.txt	/*'paragraphs'*
 'paste'	options.txt	/*'paste'*
@@ -746,6 +749,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'pmbcs'	options.txt	/*'pmbcs'*
 'pmbfn'	options.txt	/*'pmbfn'*
 'popt'	options.txt	/*'popt'*
+'pp'	options.txt	/*'pp'*
 'preserveindent'	options.txt	/*'preserveindent'*
 'previewheight'	options.txt	/*'previewheight'*
 'previewwindow'	options.txt	/*'previewwindow'*
@@ -1270,7 +1274,6 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 +scrollbind	various.txt	/*+scrollbind*
 +signs	various.txt	/*+signs*
 +smartindent	various.txt	/*+smartindent*
-+sniff	various.txt	/*+sniff*
 +startuptime	various.txt	/*+startuptime*
 +statusline	various.txt	/*+statusline*
 +sun_workshop	various.txt	/*+sun_workshop*
@@ -1285,6 +1288,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 +termresponse	various.txt	/*+termresponse*
 +textobjects	various.txt	/*+textobjects*
 +tgetent	various.txt	/*+tgetent*
++timers	various.txt	/*+timers*
 +title	various.txt	/*+title*
 +toolbar	various.txt	/*+toolbar*
 +user_commands	various.txt	/*+user_commands*
@@ -1321,6 +1325,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 --literal	starting.txt	/*--literal*
 --nofork	starting.txt	/*--nofork*
 --noplugin	starting.txt	/*--noplugin*
+--not-a-term	starting.txt	/*--not-a-term*
 --remote	remote.txt	/*--remote*
 --remote-expr	remote.txt	/*--remote-expr*
 --remote-send	remote.txt	/*--remote-send*
@@ -1632,6 +1637,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 05.5	usr_05.txt	/*05.5*
 05.6	usr_05.txt	/*05.6*
 05.7	usr_05.txt	/*05.7*
+05.8	usr_05.txt	/*05.8*
 06.1	usr_06.txt	/*06.1*
 06.2	usr_06.txt	/*06.2*
 06.3	usr_06.txt	/*06.3*
@@ -2616,6 +2622,10 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :ounmenu	gui.txt	/*:ounmenu*
 :ownsyntax	syntax.txt	/*:ownsyntax*
 :p	various.txt	/*:p*
+:pa	repeat.txt	/*:pa*
+:packadd	repeat.txt	/*:packadd*
+:packl	repeat.txt	/*:packl*
+:packloadall	repeat.txt	/*:packloadall*
 :pc	windows.txt	/*:pc*
 :pclose	windows.txt	/*:pclose*
 :pe	if_perl.txt	/*:pe*
@@ -2856,8 +2866,6 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :smile	index.txt	/*:smile*
 :sn	windows.txt	/*:sn*
 :snext	windows.txt	/*:snext*
-:sni	if_sniff.txt	/*:sni*
-:sniff	if_sniff.txt	/*:sniff*
 :sno	change.txt	/*:sno*
 :snomagic	change.txt	/*:snomagic*
 :snor	map.txt	/*:snor*
@@ -3540,6 +3548,7 @@ CTRL-\_CTRL-N	intro.txt	/*CTRL-\\_CTRL-N*
 CTRL-]	tagsrch.txt	/*CTRL-]*
 CTRL-^	editing.txt	/*CTRL-^*
 CTRL-{char}	intro.txt	/*CTRL-{char}*
+Channel	eval.txt	/*Channel*
 Chinese	mbyte.txt	/*Chinese*
 Cmd-event	autocmd.txt	/*Cmd-event*
 CmdUndefined	autocmd.txt	/*CmdUndefined*
@@ -3563,7 +3572,6 @@ D	change.txt	/*D*
 DOS	os_dos.txt	/*DOS*
 DOS-format	editing.txt	/*DOS-format*
 DOS-format-write	editing.txt	/*DOS-format-write*
-DPMI	os_msdos.txt	/*DPMI*
 Dictionaries	eval.txt	/*Dictionaries*
 Dictionary	eval.txt	/*Dictionary*
 Dictionary-function	eval.txt	/*Dictionary-function*
@@ -3756,12 +3764,7 @@ E270	if_ruby.txt	/*E270*
 E271	if_ruby.txt	/*E271*
 E272	if_ruby.txt	/*E272*
 E273	if_ruby.txt	/*E273*
-E274	if_sniff.txt	/*E274*
-E275	if_sniff.txt	/*E275*
-E276	if_sniff.txt	/*E276*
 E277	remote.txt	/*E277*
-E278	if_sniff.txt	/*E278*
-E279	if_sniff.txt	/*E279*
 E28	syntax.txt	/*E28*
 E280	if_tcl.txt	/*E280*
 E281	if_tcl.txt	/*E281*
@@ -3944,11 +3947,6 @@ E447	editing.txt	/*E447*
 E448	various.txt	/*E448*
 E449	eval.txt	/*E449*
 E45	message.txt	/*E45*
-E450	os_msdos.txt	/*E450*
-E451	os_msdos.txt	/*E451*
-E452	os_msdos.txt	/*E452*
-E453	os_msdos.txt	/*E453*
-E454	os_msdos.txt	/*E454*
 E455	print.txt	/*E455*
 E456	print.txt	/*E456*
 E457	print.txt	/*E457*
@@ -4220,7 +4218,6 @@ E702	eval.txt	/*E702*
 E703	eval.txt	/*E703*
 E704	eval.txt	/*E704*
 E705	eval.txt	/*E705*
-E706	eval.txt	/*E706*
 E707	eval.txt	/*E707*
 E708	eval.txt	/*E708*
 E709	eval.txt	/*E709*
@@ -4427,7 +4424,6 @@ E893	eval.txt	/*E893*
 E894	eval.txt	/*E894*
 E895	if_mzsch.txt	/*E895*
 E896	channel.txt	/*E896*
-E897	channel.txt	/*E897*
 E898	channel.txt	/*E898*
 E899	channel.txt	/*E899*
 E90	message.txt	/*E90*
@@ -4447,7 +4443,19 @@ E911	eval.txt	/*E911*
 E912	eval.txt	/*E912*
 E913	eval.txt	/*E913*
 E914	eval.txt	/*E914*
+E915	channel.txt	/*E915*
+E916	eval.txt	/*E916*
+E917	eval.txt	/*E917*
+E918	channel.txt	/*E918*
+E919	repeat.txt	/*E919*
 E92	message.txt	/*E92*
+E920	channel.txt	/*E920*
+E921	channel.txt	/*E921*
+E922	eval.txt	/*E922*
+E923	eval.txt	/*E923*
+E924	quickfix.txt	/*E924*
+E925	quickfix.txt	/*E925*
+E926	quickfix.txt	/*E926*
 E93	windows.txt	/*E93*
 E94	windows.txt	/*E94*
 E95	message.txt	/*E95*
@@ -4515,6 +4523,7 @@ InsertEnter	autocmd.txt	/*InsertEnter*
 InsertLeave	autocmd.txt	/*InsertLeave*
 J	change.txt	/*J*
 Japanese	mbyte.txt	/*Japanese*
+Job	eval.txt	/*Job*
 K	various.txt	/*K*
 KDE	gui_x11.txt	/*KDE*
 KVim	gui_x11.txt	/*KVim*
@@ -4659,6 +4668,7 @@ ShellCmdPost	autocmd.txt	/*ShellCmdPost*
 ShellFilterPost	autocmd.txt	/*ShellFilterPost*
 SourceCmd	autocmd.txt	/*SourceCmd*
 SourcePre	autocmd.txt	/*SourcePre*
+Special	eval.txt	/*Special*
 SpellFileMissing	autocmd.txt	/*SpellFileMissing*
 StdinReadPost	autocmd.txt	/*StdinReadPost*
 StdinReadPre	autocmd.txt	/*StdinReadPre*
@@ -4879,6 +4889,7 @@ add-filetype-plugin	usr_05.txt	/*add-filetype-plugin*
 add-global-plugin	usr_05.txt	/*add-global-plugin*
 add-local-help	usr_05.txt	/*add-local-help*
 add-option-flags	options.txt	/*add-option-flags*
+add-package	usr_05.txt	/*add-package*
 add-plugin	usr_05.txt	/*add-plugin*
 added-5.1	version5.txt	/*added-5.1*
 added-5.2	version5.txt	/*added-5.2*
@@ -5168,9 +5179,15 @@ cc	change.txt	/*cc*
 ceil()	eval.txt	/*ceil()*
 ch.vim	syntax.txt	/*ch.vim*
 ch_close()	eval.txt	/*ch_close()*
+ch_evalexpr()	eval.txt	/*ch_evalexpr()*
+ch_evalraw()	eval.txt	/*ch_evalraw()*
+ch_getbufnr()	eval.txt	/*ch_getbufnr()*
+ch_getjob()	eval.txt	/*ch_getjob()*
+ch_info()	eval.txt	/*ch_info()*
 ch_log()	eval.txt	/*ch_log()*
 ch_logfile()	eval.txt	/*ch_logfile()*
 ch_open()	eval.txt	/*ch_open()*
+ch_read()	eval.txt	/*ch_read()*
 ch_readraw()	eval.txt	/*ch_readraw()*
 ch_sendexpr()	eval.txt	/*ch_sendexpr()*
 ch_sendraw()	eval.txt	/*ch_sendraw()*
@@ -5203,12 +5220,15 @@ changetick	eval.txt	/*changetick*
 changing	change.txt	/*changing*
 channel	channel.txt	/*channel*
 channel-callback	channel.txt	/*channel-callback*
+channel-close	channel.txt	/*channel-close*
 channel-commands	channel.txt	/*channel-commands*
 channel-demo	channel.txt	/*channel-demo*
 channel-mode	channel.txt	/*channel-mode*
 channel-more	channel.txt	/*channel-more*
 channel-open	channel.txt	/*channel-open*
+channel-open-options	channel.txt	/*channel-open-options*
 channel-raw	channel.txt	/*channel-raw*
+channel-timeout	channel.txt	/*channel-timeout*
 channel-use	channel.txt	/*channel-use*
 channel.txt	channel.txt	/*channel.txt*
 char-variable	eval.txt	/*char-variable*
@@ -5222,6 +5242,7 @@ charity	uganda.txt	/*charity*
 charset	mbyte.txt	/*charset*
 charset-conversion	mbyte.txt	/*charset-conversion*
 chill.vim	syntax.txt	/*chill.vim*
+chmod	eval.txt	/*chmod*
 cindent()	eval.txt	/*cindent()*
 cinkeys-format	indent.txt	/*cinkeys-format*
 cino-#	indent.txt	/*cino-#*
@@ -5273,6 +5294,7 @@ clipboard-html	options.txt	/*clipboard-html*
 clipboard-unnamed	options.txt	/*clipboard-unnamed*
 clipboard-unnamedplus	options.txt	/*clipboard-unnamedplus*
 clojure-indent	indent.txt	/*clojure-indent*
+close_cb	channel.txt	/*close_cb*
 cmdarg-variable	eval.txt	/*cmdarg-variable*
 cmdbang-variable	eval.txt	/*cmdbang-variable*
 cmdline-arguments	vi_diff.txt	/*cmdline-arguments*
@@ -5599,8 +5621,6 @@ dos-locations	os_dos.txt	/*dos-locations*
 dos-shell	os_dos.txt	/*dos-shell*
 dos-standard-mappings	os_dos.txt	/*dos-standard-mappings*
 dos-temp-files	os_dos.txt	/*dos-temp-files*
-dos16	os_msdos.txt	/*dos16*
-dos32	os_msdos.txt	/*dos32*
 dosbatch.vim	syntax.txt	/*dosbatch.vim*
 double-click	term.txt	/*double-click*
 download	intro.txt	/*download*
@@ -5639,6 +5659,11 @@ end	intro.txt	/*end*
 end-of-file	pattern.txt	/*end-of-file*
 enlightened-terminal	syntax.txt	/*enlightened-terminal*
 erlang.vim	syntax.txt	/*erlang.vim*
+err_buf	channel.txt	/*err_buf*
+err_cb	channel.txt	/*err_cb*
+err_mode	channel.txt	/*err_mode*
+err_name	channel.txt	/*err_name*
+err_timeout	channel.txt	/*err_timeout*
 errmsg-variable	eval.txt	/*errmsg-variable*
 error-file-format	quickfix.txt	/*error-file-format*
 error-messages	message.txt	/*error-messages*
@@ -6026,6 +6051,7 @@ ft-xml-omni	insert.txt	/*ft-xml-omni*
 ft-xml-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-xml-syntax*
 ft-xpm-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-xpm-syntax*
 ft-yaml-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-yaml-syntax*
+ft-zsh-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-zsh-syntax*
 ft_ada.txt	ft_ada.txt	/*ft_ada.txt*
 ft_sql.txt	ft_sql.txt	/*ft_sql.txt*
 ftdetect	filetype.txt	/*ftdetect*
@@ -6433,7 +6459,6 @@ gui-shell-win32	gui_w32.txt	/*gui-shell-win32*
 gui-start	gui.txt	/*gui-start*
 gui-toolbar	gui.txt	/*gui-toolbar*
 gui-vert-scroll	gui.txt	/*gui-vert-scroll*
-gui-w16	gui_w16.txt	/*gui-w16*
 gui-w32	gui_w32.txt	/*gui-w32*
 gui-w32-cmdargs	gui_w32.txt	/*gui-w32-cmdargs*
 gui-w32-dialogs	gui_w32.txt	/*gui-w32-dialogs*
@@ -6455,7 +6480,6 @@ gui-x11-printing	gui_x11.txt	/*gui-x11-printing*
 gui-x11-start	gui_x11.txt	/*gui-x11-start*
 gui-x11-various	gui_x11.txt	/*gui-x11-various*
 gui.txt	gui.txt	/*gui.txt*
-gui_w16.txt	gui_w16.txt	/*gui_w16.txt*
 gui_w32.txt	gui_w32.txt	/*gui_w32.txt*
 gui_x11.txt	gui_x11.txt	/*gui_x11.txt*
 guifontwide_gtk2	options.txt	/*guifontwide_gtk2*
@@ -6758,6 +6782,11 @@ improved-viminfo	version5.txt	/*improved-viminfo*
 improvements-5	version5.txt	/*improvements-5*
 improvements-6	version6.txt	/*improvements-6*
 improvements-7	version7.txt	/*improvements-7*
+in_bot	channel.txt	/*in_bot*
+in_buf	channel.txt	/*in_buf*
+in_mode	channel.txt	/*in_mode*
+in_name	channel.txt	/*in_name*
+in_top	channel.txt	/*in_top*
 inactive-buffer	windows.txt	/*inactive-buffer*
 include-search	tagsrch.txt	/*include-search*
 inclusive	motion.txt	/*inclusive*
@@ -6819,6 +6848,7 @@ iquote	motion.txt	/*iquote*
 is	motion.txt	/*is*
 isdirectory()	eval.txt	/*isdirectory()*
 islocked()	eval.txt	/*islocked()*
+isnan()	eval.txt	/*isnan()*
 it	motion.txt	/*it*
 italic	syntax.txt	/*italic*
 items()	eval.txt	/*items()*
@@ -6832,22 +6862,26 @@ java.vim	syntax.txt	/*java.vim*
 javascript-cinoptions	indent.txt	/*javascript-cinoptions*
 javascript-indenting	indent.txt	/*javascript-indenting*
 job	channel.txt	/*job*
+job-callback	channel.txt	/*job-callback*
 job-channel-overview	channel.txt	/*job-channel-overview*
-job-close-cb	channel.txt	/*job-close-cb*
+job-close_cb	channel.txt	/*job-close_cb*
 job-control	channel.txt	/*job-control*
-job-err-cb	channel.txt	/*job-err-cb*
-job-err-io	channel.txt	/*job-err-io*
-job-exit-cb	channel.txt	/*job-exit-cb*
-job-in-io	channel.txt	/*job-in-io*
-job-killonexit	channel.txt	/*job-killonexit*
-job-may-start	channel.txt	/*job-may-start*
+job-err_cb	channel.txt	/*job-err_cb*
+job-err_io	channel.txt	/*job-err_io*
+job-exit_cb	channel.txt	/*job-exit_cb*
+job-in_io	channel.txt	/*job-in_io*
 job-options	channel.txt	/*job-options*
-job-out-cb	channel.txt	/*job-out-cb*
-job-out-io	channel.txt	/*job-out-io*
+job-out_cb	channel.txt	/*job-out_cb*
+job-out_io	channel.txt	/*job-out_io*
 job-start	channel.txt	/*job-start*
+job-start-if-needed	channel.txt	/*job-start-if-needed*
 job-start-nochannel	channel.txt	/*job-start-nochannel*
+job-stoponexit	channel.txt	/*job-stoponexit*
 job-term	channel.txt	/*job-term*
+job-timeout	channel.txt	/*job-timeout*
 job_getchannel()	eval.txt	/*job_getchannel()*
+job_info()	eval.txt	/*job_info()*
+job_setoptions()	eval.txt	/*job_setoptions()*
 job_start()	eval.txt	/*job_start()*
 job_status()	eval.txt	/*job_status()*
 job_stop()	eval.txt	/*job_stop()*
@@ -7098,7 +7132,6 @@ message.txt	message.txt	/*message.txt*
 messages	message.txt	/*messages*
 meta	intro.txt	/*meta*
 min()	eval.txt	/*min()*
-minimal-features	os_msdos.txt	/*minimal-features*
 missing-options	vi_diff.txt	/*missing-options*
 mkdir()	eval.txt	/*mkdir()*
 mlang.txt	mlang.txt	/*mlang.txt*
@@ -7129,18 +7162,7 @@ mouse_win-variable	eval.txt	/*mouse_win-variable*
 movement	intro.txt	/*movement*
 ms-dos	os_msdos.txt	/*ms-dos*
 msdos	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos*
-msdos-arrows	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-arrows*
-msdos-clipboard-limits	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-clipboard-limits*
-msdos-compiling	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-compiling*
-msdos-copy-paste	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-copy-paste*
-msdos-fname-extensions	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-fname-extensions*
-msdos-limitations	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-limitations*
-msdos-linked-files	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-linked-files*
-msdos-longfname	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-longfname*
 msdos-mode	gui_w32.txt	/*msdos-mode*
-msdos-problems	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-problems*
-msdos-termcap	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-termcap*
-msdos-versions	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-versions*
 msql.vim	syntax.txt	/*msql.vim*
 mswin.vim	gui_w32.txt	/*mswin.vim*
 multi-byte	mbyte.txt	/*multi-byte*
@@ -7509,6 +7531,7 @@ news	intro.txt	/*news*
 nextnonblank()	eval.txt	/*nextnonblank()*
 nice	todo.txt	/*nice*
 no-eval-feature	eval.txt	/*no-eval-feature*
+no-type-checking	eval.txt	/*no-type-checking*
 no_buffers_menu	gui.txt	/*no_buffers_menu*
 non-greedy	pattern.txt	/*non-greedy*
 non-zero-arg	eval.txt	/*non-zero-arg*
@@ -7577,7 +7600,15 @@ os_unix.txt	os_unix.txt	/*os_unix.txt*
 os_vms.txt	os_vms.txt	/*os_vms.txt*
 os_win32.txt	os_win32.txt	/*os_win32.txt*
 other-features	vi_diff.txt	/*other-features*
+out_buf	channel.txt	/*out_buf*
+out_cb	channel.txt	/*out_cb*
+out_mode	channel.txt	/*out_mode*
+out_name	channel.txt	/*out_name*
+out_timeout	channel.txt	/*out_timeout*
 p	change.txt	/*p*
+pack-add	repeat.txt	/*pack-add*
+package-create	repeat.txt	/*package-create*
+packages	repeat.txt	/*packages*
 page-down	intro.txt	/*page-down*
 page-up	intro.txt	/*page-up*
 page_down	intro.txt	/*page_down*
@@ -7980,6 +8011,7 @@ set-spc-auto	spell.txt	/*set-spc-auto*
 setbufvar()	eval.txt	/*setbufvar()*
 setcharsearch()	eval.txt	/*setcharsearch()*
 setcmdpos()	eval.txt	/*setcmdpos()*
+setfperm()	eval.txt	/*setfperm()*
 setline()	eval.txt	/*setline()*
 setloclist()	eval.txt	/*setloclist()*
 setmatches()	eval.txt	/*setmatches()*
@@ -8024,10 +8056,6 @@ slice	eval.txt	/*slice*
 slow-fast-terminal	term.txt	/*slow-fast-terminal*
 slow-start	starting.txt	/*slow-start*
 slow-terminal	term.txt	/*slow-terminal*
-sniff	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff*
-sniff-commands	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-commands*
-sniff-compiling	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-compiling*
-sniff-intro	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-intro*
 socket-interface	channel.txt	/*socket-interface*
 sort()	eval.txt	/*sort()*
 sorting	change.txt	/*sorting*
@@ -8194,7 +8222,6 @@ startup-terminal	term.txt	/*startup-terminal*
 static-tag	tagsrch.txt	/*static-tag*
 status-line	windows.txt	/*status-line*
 statusmsg-variable	eval.txt	/*statusmsg-variable*
-sticky-type-checking	eval.txt	/*sticky-type-checking*
 str2float()	eval.txt	/*str2float()*
 str2nr()	eval.txt	/*str2nr()*
 strcasestr()	eval.txt	/*strcasestr()*
@@ -8575,6 +8602,8 @@ throw-from-catch	eval.txt	/*throw-from-catch*
 throw-variables	eval.txt	/*throw-variables*
 throwpoint-variable	eval.txt	/*throwpoint-variable*
 time-functions	usr_41.txt	/*time-functions*
+timer_start()	eval.txt	/*timer_start()*
+timer_stop()	eval.txt	/*timer_stop()*
 timestamp	editing.txt	/*timestamp*
 timestamps	editing.txt	/*timestamps*
 tips	tips.txt	/*tips*
@@ -8746,6 +8775,7 @@ v:true	eval.txt	/*v:true*
 v:val	eval.txt	/*v:val*
 v:var	eval.txt	/*v:var*
 v:version	eval.txt	/*v:version*
+v:vim_did_enter	eval.txt	/*v:vim_did_enter*
 v:warningmsg	eval.txt	/*v:warningmsg*
 v:windowid	eval.txt	/*v:windowid*
 v_!	change.txt	/*v_!*
@@ -8919,6 +8949,8 @@ vim-variable	eval.txt	/*vim-variable*
 vim.vim	syntax.txt	/*vim.vim*
 vim7	version7.txt	/*vim7*
 vim:	options.txt	/*vim:*
+vim_did_enter-variable	eval.txt	/*vim_did_enter-variable*
+vim_starting	eval.txt	/*vim_starting*
 vimball	pi_vimball.txt	/*vimball*
 vimball-contents	pi_vimball.txt	/*vimball-contents*
 vimball-extract	pi_vimball.txt	/*vimball-extract*
@@ -8995,25 +9027,13 @@ w:	eval.txt	/*w:*
 w:current_syntax	syntax.txt	/*w:current_syntax*
 w:quickfix_title	quickfix.txt	/*w:quickfix_title*
 w:var	eval.txt	/*w:var*
+waittime	channel.txt	/*waittime*
 warningmsg-variable	eval.txt	/*warningmsg-variable*
 white-space	pattern.txt	/*white-space*
 whitespace	pattern.txt	/*whitespace*
 wildcard	editing.txt	/*wildcard*
 wildcards	editing.txt	/*wildcards*
 wildmenumode()	eval.txt	/*wildmenumode()*
-win16-!start	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-!start*
-win16-clipboard	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-clipboard*
-win16-colors	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-colors*
-win16-default-editor	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-default-editor*
-win16-dialogs	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-dialogs*
-win16-drag-n-drop	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-drag-n-drop*
-win16-gui	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-gui*
-win16-maximized	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-maximized*
-win16-printing	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-printing*
-win16-shell	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-shell*
-win16-start	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-start*
-win16-truetype	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-truetype*
-win16-various	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-various*
 win32	os_win32.txt	/*win32*
 win32-!start	gui_w32.txt	/*win32-!start*
 win32-PATH	os_win32.txt	/*win32-PATH*
@@ -9028,12 +9048,18 @@ win32-mouse	os_win32.txt	/*win32-mouse*
 win32-open-with-menu	gui_w32.txt	/*win32-open-with-menu*
 win32-popup-menu	gui_w32.txt	/*win32-popup-menu*
 win32-problems	os_win32.txt	/*win32-problems*
+win32-quotes	os_win32.txt	/*win32-quotes*
 win32-restore	os_win32.txt	/*win32-restore*
 win32-startup	os_win32.txt	/*win32-startup*
 win32-term	os_win32.txt	/*win32-term*
 win32-vimrun	gui_w32.txt	/*win32-vimrun*
 win32-win3.1	os_win32.txt	/*win32-win3.1*
 win32s	os_win32.txt	/*win32s*
+win_findbuf()	eval.txt	/*win_findbuf()*
+win_getid()	eval.txt	/*win_getid()*
+win_gotoid()	eval.txt	/*win_gotoid()*
+win_id2tabwin()	eval.txt	/*win_id2tabwin()*
+win_id2win()	eval.txt	/*win_id2win()*
 winbufnr()	eval.txt	/*winbufnr()*
 wincol()	eval.txt	/*wincol()*
 window	windows.txt	/*window*
@@ -9190,6 +9216,7 @@ zn	fold.txt	/*zn*
 zo	fold.txt	/*zo*
 zr	fold.txt	/*zr*
 zs	scroll.txt	/*zs*
+zsh.vim	syntax.txt	/*zsh.vim*
 zt	scroll.txt	/*zt*
 zuG	spell.txt	/*zuG*
 zuW	spell.txt	/*zuW*

runtime/doc/todo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 20
+*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -34,108 +34,51 @@ not be repeated below, unless there is extra information.
 							*known-bugs*
 -------------------- Known bugs and current work -----------------------
 
+assert_matches('pattern', value)
+
 +channel:
-- channel needs both stdout and stderr (GUI implementation, queues)
-   - ch_read() for stderr
-- implement TODO items in ":help channel":
-   - implement ch_setoptions(handle, {options})
-   - job_setoptions(job, {options})
-   - ch_close() closes stdin/stdout/stderr
-   - out-cb
-   - err-cb
-   - exit-cb  move code from mch_clear_job()
-   - job argument: killonexit
-   - ch_getjob(handle)
-   - ch_read(handle [, timeout])
-   - ch_readall(handle [, timeout])
-   - job_info() should remove usable info: process ID, run/dead, etc.
-   - job_maystart()
-   - job_gethandle(), job_sethandle()
-   - add ch_status(): Whether channel is open.  Perhaps also mode, timeout.
-   - When channel closes invoke "close-cb".
-- Add "call" to call a function with a list of arguments. (Damien)
-    merge "expr" and "eval", send something back if there is a third arg?
-- A callback on ch_sendraw() should be put at the end of the list of callback
-  handlers.  When a message arrives invoke the first one and remove it.
-- Support channel without socket support.  Useful for starting a job with
-  pipes.  Need another feature, +socket ?
-- Move more details from eval.txt to channel.txt.  Add tags in eval.txt.
-- When receiving malformed json starting with a quote it doesn't get
-  discarded.
-- When message in queue but there is no callback, drop it after a while?
-- Crash when closing channel after ch_sendexpr() with callback and outstanding
-  request (Christian Robinson).
-- cleanup on exit?  in mch_getout() and getout().
-- On Mac a 1 msec waittime is needed in ch_open(), why?
-- Add more log calls, basically at every branch, before every callback, etc.
-- Add timestamp to queued messages and callbacks with ID, remove after a
-  minute.
-- add remark about undo sync, is there a way to force it?
+- When decoding json, don't read all the typeahead at once, use the reader
+  properly.
+- When a message in the queue but there is no callback, drop it after a while?
+  Add timestamp to queued messages and callbacks with ID, remove after a
+  minute.  Option to set the droptime.
+- Add remark about undo sync, is there a way to force it?
 - When starting a job, have an option to open the server socket, so we know
   the port, and pass it to the command with --socket-fd {nr}. (Olaf Dabrunz,
   Feb 9)  How to do this on MS-Windows?
-- Add more unit-testing in json_test.c
-- Add a test where ["eval","getline(123)"] gets a line with special
-  characters (NUL, 0x80, etc.).  Check that it isn't garbled.
-- make sure errors lead to a useful error msg. ["ex","foobar"]
-- json: implement UTF-16 surrogate pair.
+- Make sure errors lead to a useful error msg. ["ex","foobar"]
 - For connection to server, a "keep open" flag would be useful.  Retry
   connecting in the main loop with zero timeout.
+Later
+- job_start(): run job in a newly opened terminal.
+    With xterm could use -S{pty}.
 
-More plugin support:
-- Have a way to install a callback from the main loop.  Called every second or
-  so.
-- Need way to uniquely identify a window, no matter how windows are
-  rearranged.  Same for tab pages.
-      getwinid()             ID of current winow
-      getwinid({nr})         ID of window {nr}
-      getwinid({nr}, {tab})  ID of window {nr} in tab page {tab}
-      getwinnr({id})	     window nr of {id} or -1 if not open
-      gettabnr({id})	     tab page nr of {id} or -1 if not open
-      gotowin({id})
-  Make it so that the window ID can be used where currently a window nr is used
+Partial:
+- Maybe we also need VAR_PARTIAL support in if_mzsch.
 
-Patch on #608: (Ken Takata)
-https://bitbucket.org/k_takata/vim-ktakata-mq/src/479934b94fd56b064c9e4bd8737585c5df69d56a/fix-gvimext-loadlibrary.patch?fileviewer=file-view-default
+Packages:
+- make package for editexisting, others?
 
-This difference is unexpected:
-    echo v:true == 1
-    1
-    echo [v:true] == [1]
-    0
-It's because tv_equal() works different.
+Make it so that the window ID can be used where currently a window nr is used
 
-Compiler warnings. (John Marriott, Feb 17)
+Fix to support --nofork for Windows batch files. (Kevin Cantú, 2016 Feb 23,
+#658, #659)  Also add "setlocal" at top of batch file?
 
-Compiler warnings in if_ole.cpp.  Patch by Ken Takata, Feb 18.
-
-Add "runtime/bundles" ?
-    runtime/bundles/netrw/spec.vim
-    runtime/bundles/netrw/autoload/netrw.vim
-    runtime/bundles/netrw/syntax/netrw.vim
-    etc.
-Need an alternative for 'runtimepath' that tells where bundles are to be
-found. 'bundlepath' ?
-The plugins under 'bundlepath' would always be loaded.  Also have a path for
-optional plugins?  'optbundlepath'?  Or have directories "bundlesdef" and
-"bundlesopt"?
-Then use a command "loadplugin" to find a plugin in "optional".
-"bundles" is used by some plugin managers, need another name. "packages"?
-Add a "requires" / "provides" mechanism?
-    if my_feature_enabled
-      require +python
-    endif
-    require my_other_plugin
-~/vim/packages/netrw/def/netrw/plugin/netrw.vim
-~/vim/packages/netrw/opt/nwdebug/plugin/nwdebug.vim
-
-Patch to add GTK 3 support. (Kazunobu Kuriyama, 2016 Feb 13)
+Patch to add matchstrpos(). (Ozaki Kiichi, 2016 Feb 28)
 
 Why does this: 	echo "a" . 1.1
 result in:	a11
 Should recognize float (so long as it's not ".1.1").
 
-Allow for an empty dictionary key.
+Patch to make tag jump work on function({expr}). (Hirohito Higashi, 2016 Mar
+25)
+
+Allow for an empty dictionary key?
+
+Patch to improve I/O for Perl. (Damien, 2016 Jan 9, update Jan 22 2nd one)
+
+Patch to fix ml_get error. (Alexander Freiherr von Buddenbrock, 2016 Mar 4,
+#676)
 
 Regexp problems:
 - The regexp engines are not reentrant, causing havoc when interrupted by a
@@ -179,35 +122,78 @@ Regexp problems:
   matches the empty string. (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Oct 2, Nov 24)
 - Search for \\~ causes error E874.
 
+Using freed memory in quickfix code. (Dominique, 2016 Mar 21)
+
+Patch 7.4.1401 caused autochdir not to work on startup. (Rob Hoelz, #704)
+
 Patch to fix that folds close with autocomplete.  #643
 Christian Brabandt, 2016 Feb 18.
 
 Also include update_curswant() fix for getcurpos(). (Christian Brabandt, 2016
 Feb 9)
 
+Patch to list some messages and clear messages. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2016 Mar
+12)
+
+Patch to fix escaping special characters for delete(). (tc-0, 2016 Mar 20,
+#700) Test fails on MS-Windows.
+
 Patch to put undo options together in undo window.
 (Gary Johnson, 2016 Jan 28)
 
-Patch for clearing history. (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2016 Jan 31, second message
-has tests)
+Patch to have better check for {action} argument of setqflist().
+Nikolai Pavlov, Feb 25, #661.  Can be even more strict.
+Also see patch from Hirohito Higash, Feb 25.
+Updated patch, 2016 Mar 25.
 
 Patch to update the GTK icon cache when installing. (Kazunobu Kuriyama, 2016
 Feb 3)
 
 Patch for test86 and test87. (Roland Puntaier, #622)
 
+Cannot delete a file with square brackets with delete(). (#696)
+
+Patch to add 'topbot' to 'belloff' option. (Coot, 2016 Mar 18, #695)
+
+Patch to make matchit work better, respect 'matchpairs'. (Ken Takata, 2016 Mar
+25)
+
+We can use '. to go to the last change in the current buffer, but how about
+the last change in any buffer?  Can we use ', (, is next to .)?
+
 Patch for Python: #622. (Roland Puntaier, 2016 Feb 2)
 What does it change?
 
+It's possible to add ",," to 'wildignore', an empty entry.  Causes problems.
+Reject the value? #710.
+
+Win32: patch to use 64 bit stat() if possible. (Ken Takata, 2014 May 12)
+More tests May 14. Update May 29.  Update Aug 10.
+Now part of large file patches. (Ken Takata, 2016 Feb 1)
+Two patches now?  New update Feb 24.
+
+Patch to support 64 bit ints for Number. (Ken Takata, 2016 Jan 21)
+Also in update of Feb 24?
+
+After 7.5 is released:
+- Drop support for older MS-Windows systems, before XP.
+  Patch from Ken Takata, 2016 Mar 8.
+
+Add stronger encryption.  Could use libsodium (NaCl).
+https://github.com/jedisct1/libsodium/
+Possibly include the needed code so that it can be build everywhere.
+
+Patch to add setbufline(). (email from Yasuhiro Matsumoto, patch by Ozaki
+Kiichi, 2016 Feb 28)
+Update Mar 8: https://gist.github.com/mattn/23c1f50999084992ca98
+Update Mar 13: https://gist.github.com/mattn/23c1f50999084992ca98
+
 Need to try out instructions in INSSTALLpc.txt about how to install all
 interfaces and how to build Vim with them.
 Appveyor build with self-installing executable, includes getting most
 interfaces: https://github.com/k-takata/vim/tree/chrisbra-appveyor-build
 result: https://ci.appveyor.com/project/k-takata/vim/history
 
-Still using freed memory after using setloclist(). (lcd, 2014 Jul 23)
-More info Jul 24.  Not clear why.
-
 Duplication of completion suggestions for ":!hom".  Issue 539.
 Patch by Christian, 2016 Jan 29
 >
@@ -222,8 +208,6 @@ What if there is an invalid character?
 Should jsonencode()/jsondecode() restrict recursiveness?
 Or avoid recursiveness.
 
-Patch to fix bug in statusline highlighting. (Christian Brabandt, 2016 Feb 2)
-
 Use vim.vim syntax highlighting for help file examples, but without ":" in
 'iskeyword' for syntax.
 
@@ -232,6 +216,10 @@ Patch to make "%:h:h" return "." instead of the full path.
 
 Remove SPACE_IN_FILENAME ? What could possibly go wrong?
 
+Patch to change GUI behavior: instead of changing the window size change the
+lines/columns when menu/toolbar/etc. is added/removed. (Ychin, 2016 Mar 20,
+#703)
+
 Installation of .desktop files does not work everywhere.
 It's now fixed, but the target directory probably isn't right.
 Add configure check?
@@ -239,9 +227,6 @@ Should use /usr/local/share/applications or /usr/share/applications.
 Or use $XDG_DATA_DIRS.
 Also need to run update-desktop-database (Kuriyama Kazunobu, 2015 Nov 4)
 
-Move the README files that are for including in archives to a subdirectory.
-"readmedir/" ?
-
 Access to uninitialized memory in match_backref() regexp_nda.c:4882
 (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Nov 6)
 
@@ -251,12 +236,9 @@ directory exists. (Sergio Gallelli, 2013 Dec 29)
 Patch to avoid redrawing tabline when the popup menu is visible.
 (Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jan 28)
 
-Win32: patch to use 64 bit stat() if possible. (Ken Takata, 2014 May 12)
-More tests May 14. Update May 29.  Update Aug 10.
-Now part of large file patches. (Ken Takata, 2016 Feb 1)
-Two patches now?
+Patch to add {skip} argument to search(). (Christian Brabandt, 2016 Feb 24)
 
-Patch to support 64 bit ints for Number. (Ken Takata, 2016 Jan 21)
+Add value "smart" to 'tagcase': ignore case when tag is all lower case.
 
 7   Add a watchpoint in the debug mode: An expression that breaks execution
     when evaluating to non-zero.  Add the "watchadd expr" command, stop when
@@ -285,6 +267,8 @@ https://gist.github.com/presuku/d3d6b230b9b6dcfc0477
 Patch to make the behavior of "w" more straightforward, but not Vi compatible.
 With a 'cpo' flag.  (Christian Brabandt, 2016 Feb 8)
 
+Patch to add optionproperties(). (Anton Lindqvist, 2016 Mar 26)
+
 Patch to add TagNotFound autocommand. (Anton Lindqvist, 2016 Feb 3)
 
 Patch to add Error autocommand. (Anton Lindqvist, 2016 Feb 17)
@@ -308,7 +292,7 @@ set_color_count().
 
 Python: ":py raw_input('prompt')" doesn't work. (Manu Hack)
 
-Comparing nested structures with "==" uses a different comperator than when
+Comparing nested structures with "==" uses a different comparator than when
 comparing individual items.
 Also, "'' == 0" evaluates to true, which isn't nice.
 Add "===" to have a strict comparison (type and value match).
@@ -335,6 +319,9 @@ Patch to add :mapgroup, put mappings in a group like augroup.
 Value returned by virtcol() changes depending on how lines wrap.  This is
 inconsistent with the documentation.
 
+Patch to add filtering of the quickfix list. (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2016 Mar
+13, last version)  Update Mar 21.
+
 Can we cache the syntax attributes, so that updates for 'relativenumber' and
 'cursorline'/'cursorcolumn' are a lot faster?
 
@@ -346,6 +333,7 @@ Use v:none.  var == v:none
 
 Patch to add arguments to argc() and argv(). (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2016 Jan
 24)  Also need a way to get the global arg list?  Update later on Jan 24
+Update Mar 5.
 
 To support Thai (and other languages) word boundaries, include the ICU
 library:  http://userguide.icu-project.org/boundaryanalysis
@@ -396,8 +384,6 @@ Patch to add GUI colors to the terminal, when it supports it. (ZyX, 2013 Jan
 Patch for problem with restoring screen on Windows. (Nobuhiro Takasaki, 2015
 Sep 10)
 
-Patch to improve I/O for Perl. (Damien, 2015 Jan 9, update Jan 22 2nd one)
-
 Patch to set antialiasing style on Windows. (Ondrej Balaz, 2013 Mar 14)
 Needs a different check for CLEARTYPE_QUALITY.
 Problem mentioned by Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jan 4.
@@ -415,8 +401,6 @@ Patch to fix checking global option value when not using it.
 When 'showbreak' is set repeating a Visual operation counts the size of the
 'showbreak' text as part of the operation. (Axel Bender, 2015 Jul 20)
 
-Patch to apply 'fileformats' when starting Vim. (Mike Williams, 2015 Jul 22)
-
 Patch for matchit plugin related to multibyte chars. (Ken Takata, 2015 Jul 22)
 
 Patch for multi-byte characters in langmap and applying a mapping on them.
@@ -474,6 +458,7 @@ Mixup of highlighting when there is a match and SpellBad. (ZyX, 2015 Jan 1)
 Patch for drag&drop reordering of GUI tab pages reordering.
 (Ken Takata, 2013 Nov 22, second one, also by Masamichi Abe)
 Now on Git: https://gist.github.com/nocd5/165286495c782b815b94
+Update 2016 Mar 15.
 
 Patch on Issue 72: 'autochdir' causes problems for :vimgrep.
 
@@ -1579,8 +1564,6 @@ still delete them.  Also convert all buffer file names?
 
 Update src/testdir/main.aap.
 
-"vim -c 'sniff connect'" hangs Vim. (Dominique Pelle, 2008 Dec 7)
-
 Something wrong with session that has "cd" commands and "badd", in such a way
 that Vim doesn't find the edited file in the buffer list, causing the
 ATTENTION message?  (Tony Mechelynck, 2008 Dec 1)
@@ -1766,9 +1749,6 @@ Fail to edit file after failed register access.  Error flag remains set?
 Patch for redo register. (Ben Schmidt, 2007 Oct 19)
 Await response to question to make the register writable.
 
-src/testdir/Make_dos.mak: not all tests are included, e.g., test49, without a
-remark why.
-
 Problem with 'ts' set to 9 and 'showbreak' to ">>>". (Matthew Winn, 2007 Oct
 1)
 
@@ -2736,64 +2716,7 @@ GUI:
     currently.  This is very obvious on a 66Mhz 486.
 
 
-MSDOS/DJGPP:
-9   Pressing CTRL-C often crashes the console Vim runs in. (Ken Liao)
-    When 'bioskey' isn't set it doesn't happen.  Could be a problem with the
-    BIOS emulation of the console.  Version 5.6 already had this problem.
-8   DJGPP: "cd c:" can take us to a directory that no longer exists.
-    change_drive() doesn't check this.  How to check for this error?
-9   The 16 bit version runs out of memory very quickly.  Should find unused
-    code and reduce static data.  Resetting 'writebackup' helps to be able to
-    write a file.
-9   Crash when running on Windows 98 in a console window and pressing CTRL-C.
-    Happens now and then.  When debugging Vim in gdb this also happens.  Since
-    the console crashes, might be a bug in the DOS console.  Resetting
-    'bioskey' avoids it, but then CTRL-C doesn't work.
-9   DOS: Make CTRL-Fx and ALT-Fx work.
-    CTRL-F1 = CE-5E, CTRL-F2 = CE-5F, .., CTRL-F10 = CE-67
-    ALT-F1 = CE-68, ALT-F2 = CE-69, .., ALT-F10 = CE-71
-    Shifted cursor keys produce same codes as unshifted keys.  Use bioskey(2)
-    to get modifier mask for <S-C-M-Fx>.
-    Use K_SPECIAL/KS_MODIFIER codes to insert modifier mask in input stream?
-    Make this work like in Win32 console.
-    Mapping things like <M-A> doesn't work, because it generates an extended
-    key code.  Use a translation table?
-9   Can't read an opened swap file when the "share" command has not been used.
-    At least ignore the swap files that Vim has opened itself.
-8   Use DJGPP 2.03.
-8   The Dos32 version (DJGPP) can't use long file names on Windows NT.
-    Check if new package can be used (v2misc/ntlfn08[bs].zip).
-8   setlocale() is bogus.
-8   Vim busy waits for new characters or mouse clicks.	Should put in some
-    sort of sleep, to avoid eating 50% of the CPU time.  Test on an unpatched
-    Windows 95 system!
-8   DJGPP: when shell is bash, make fails. (Donahoe)
-7   Hitting CTRL-P twice quickly (e.g., in keyword completion) on a 8088
-    machine, starts printer echo! (John Mullin).
-7   MSDOS 16 bit version can't work with COMSPEC that has an argument, e.g.:
-    COMSPEC=C:\WINDOWS\COMMAND.COM /E:4096    (Bradley)
-    Caused by BCC system() function (Borland "make" has the same problem).
-8   Mouse: handle left&right button pressed as middle button pressed.  Add
-    modifier keys shift, ctrl and alt.
-7   When too many files are open (depends on FILES), strange things happen.
-    The Dos16 version runs out of memory, in the Dos32 version "!ls" causes a
-    crash.  Another symptom: .swp files are not deleted, existing files are
-    "[New file]".
-7   DJGPP version doesn't work with graphics display mode.  Switch to a mode
-    that is supported?
-8   DJGPP: ":mode" doesn't work for many modes.  Disable them.
-8   DJGPP: When starting in Ex mode, shouldn't clear the screen. (Walter
-    Briscoe)
-
-
-MSDOS, OS/2 and Win32:
-8   OS/2: Add backtick expansion.  Undefine NO_EXPANDPATH and use
-    gen_expand_wildcards().
-8   OS/2: Add clipboard support?  See example clipbrd.exe from Alexander
-    Wagner.
-8   OS/2: Add Extended Attributes support and define HAVE_ACL.
-8   OS/2: When editing a file name "foo.txt" that is actually called FOO.txt,
-    writing uses "foo.txt".  Should obtain the real file name.
+Win32 console:
 8   Should $USERPROFILE be preferred above $HOMEDRIVE/$HOMEPATH?  No, but it's
     a good fallback, thus use:
 	    $HOME
@@ -3797,7 +3720,7 @@ Syntax highlighting:
     unprintable char another color.  Would be useful for ^M at end of line.
 
 
-Built-in script language:
+Vim script language:
 8   Make the filename and line number available to script functions, so that
     they can give useful debugging info.  The whole call stack would be ideal.
     At least use this for error messages.
@@ -3818,14 +3741,10 @@ Built-in script language:
 7   ":include" command: just like ":source" but doesn't start a new scriptID?
     Will be tricky for the list of script names.
 8   Have a look at VSEL.  Would it be useful to include? (Bigham)
-8   Add ":fungroup" command, to group function definitions together.  When
-    encountered, all functions in the group are removed.  Suggest using an
-    obscure name to avoid name clashes.  Require a ":fungroup END" in the same
-    sourced file?  Assume the group ends at the end of the file.  Handle
-    nested packages?
-    Alternative: Support packages.  {package-name}:{function-name}().
-    Packages are loaded automatically when first used, from
-    $VIMRUNTIME/packages (or use a search path).
+8   Have a prefix for a function to make it unique.  When using packages it
+    can be the plugin name.
+    Perhaps also have a way to remove everything that the package added?
+    including autocommands.
 7   Pre-parse or compile Vim scripts into a bytecode.
     1. Put the bytecode with the original script, with an ":if
        has('bytecode')" around it, so that it's only used with a Vim that
@@ -3842,8 +3761,6 @@ Built-in script language:
 8   Add functions:
 	has(":command")		Check if ":command" works.  compare function
 				with "ex_ni".  E.g. for ":simalt".
-	system()		With a List argument.  Bypasses the shell, use
-				exec() directly.  (Bob Hiestand)
 	escape()		Add argument to specify what to escape with.
 	modestack()		Instead of just the current mode return the
 				stack of Insert / CTRL-O / :normal things.

runtime/doc/usr_05.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2012 Nov 20
+*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 25
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -12,10 +12,11 @@ Vim's capabilities.  Or define your own macros.
 |05.1|	The vimrc file
 |05.2|	The example vimrc file explained
 |05.3|	Simple mappings
-|05.4|	Adding a plugin
-|05.5|	Adding a help file
-|05.6|	The option window
-|05.7|	Often used options
+|05.4|	Adding a package
+|05.5|	Adding a plugin
+|05.6|	Adding a help file
+|05.7|	The option window
+|05.8|	Often used options
 
      Next chapter: |usr_06.txt|  Using syntax highlighting
  Previous chapter: |usr_04.txt|  Making small changes
@@ -263,7 +264,45 @@ The ":map" command (with no arguments) lists your current mappings.  At
 least the ones for Normal mode.  More about mappings in section |40.1|.
 
 ==============================================================================
-*05.4*	Adding a plugin					*add-plugin* *plugin*
+*05.4*	Adding a package			*add-package* *matchit-install*
+
+A package is a set of files that you can add to Vim.  There are two kinds of
+packages: optional and automatically loaded on startup.
+
+The Vim distribution comes with a few packages that you can optionally use.
+For example, the matchit plugin.  This plugin makes the "%" command jump to
+matching HTML tags, if/else/endif in Vim scripts, etc.  Very useful, although
+it's not backwards compatible (that's why it is not enabled by default).
+
+To start using the matchit plugin, add one line to your vimrc file: >
+	packadd! matchit
+
+That's all!  After restarting Vim you can find help about this plugin: >
+	:help matchit
+
+This works, because when `:packadd` loaded the plugin it also added the
+package directory in 'runtimepath', so that the help file can be found.
+
+You can find packages on the Internet in various places.  It usually comes as
+an archive or as a repository.  For an archive you can follow these steps:
+	1. create the package directory: >
+		mkdir -p ~/.vim/pack/fancy
+<	   "fancy" can be any name of your liking.  Use one that describes the
+	   package.
+	2. unpack the archive in that directory.  This assumes the top
+	   directory in the archive is "start": >
+	   	cd ~/.vim/pack/fancy
+		unzip /tmp/fancy.zip
+<	   If the archive layout is different make sure that you end up with a
+	   path like this:
+		~/.vim/pack/fancy/start/fancytext/plugin/fancy.vim ~
+	   Here "fancytext" is the name of the package, it can be anything
+	   else.
+
+More information about packages can be found here: |packages|.
+
+==============================================================================
+*05.5*	Adding a plugin					*add-plugin* *plugin*
 
 Vim's functionality can be extended by adding plugins.  A plugin is nothing
 more than a Vim script file that is loaded automatically when Vim starts.  You
@@ -415,23 +454,19 @@ Further reading:
 |new-filetype|		How to detect a new file type.
 
 ==============================================================================
-*05.5*	Adding a help file		*add-local-help* *matchit-install*
+*05.6*	Adding a help file				*add-local-help*
 
 If you are lucky, the plugin you installed also comes with a help file.  We
 will explain how to install the help file, so that you can easily find help
 for your new plugin.
-   Let us use the "matchit.vim" plugin as an example (it is included with
-Vim).  This plugin makes the "%" command jump to matching HTML tags,
-if/else/endif in Vim scripts, etc.  Very useful, although it's not backwards
-compatible (that's why it is not enabled by default).
-   This plugin comes with documentation: "matchit.txt".  Let's first copy the
-plugin to the right directory.  This time we will do it from inside Vim, so
-that we can use $VIMRUNTIME.  (You may skip some of the "mkdir" commands if
-you already have the directory.) >
+   Let us use the "doit.vim" plugin as an example.  This plugin comes with
+documentation: "doit.txt".  Let's first copy the plugin to the right
+directory.  This time we will do it from inside Vim.  (You may skip some of
+the "mkdir" commands if you already have the directory.) >
 
 	:!mkdir ~/.vim
 	:!mkdir ~/.vim/plugin
-	:!cp $VIMRUNTIME/macros/matchit.vim ~/.vim/plugin
+	:!cp /tmp/doit.vim ~/.vim/plugin
 
 The "cp" command is for Unix, on MS-DOS you can use "copy".
 
@@ -441,7 +476,7 @@ Now create a "doc" directory in one of the directories in 'runtimepath'. >
 
 Copy the help file to the "doc" directory. >
 
-	:!cp $VIMRUNTIME/macros/matchit.txt ~/.vim/doc
+	:!cp /tmp/doit.txt ~/.vim/doc
 
 Now comes the trick, which allows you to jump to the subjects in the new help
 file: Generate the local tags file with the |:helptags| command. >
@@ -450,10 +485,10 @@ file: Generate the local tags file with the |:helptags| command. >
 
 Now you can use the >
 
-	:help g%
+	:help doit
 
-command to find help for "g%" in the help file you just added.  You can see an
-entry for the local help file when you do: >
+command to find help for "doit" in the help file you just added.  You can see
+an entry for the local help file when you do: >
 
 	:help local-additions
 
@@ -464,7 +499,7 @@ them through the tag.
 For writing a local help file, see |write-local-help|.
 
 ==============================================================================
-*05.6*	The option window
+*05.7*	The option window
 
 If you are looking for an option that does what you want, you can search in
 the help files here: |options|.  Another way is by using this command: >
@@ -503,7 +538,7 @@ border.  This is what the 'scrolloff' option does, it specifies an offset
 from the window border where scrolling starts.
 
 ==============================================================================
-*05.7*	Often used options
+*05.8*	Often used options
 
 There are an awful lot of options.  Most of them you will hardly ever use.
 Some of the more useful ones will be mentioned here.  Don't forget you can

runtime/doc/usr_29.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_29.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2008 Jun 28
+*usr_29.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 27
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -265,9 +265,6 @@ doesn't work if the tags file isn't sorted.
 The 'taglength' option can be used to tell Vim the number of significant
 characters in a tag.
 
-When you use the SNiFF+ program, you can use the Vim interface to it |sniff|.
-SNiFF+ is a commercial program.
-
 Cscope is a free program.  It does not only find places where an identifier is
 declared, but also where it is used.  See |cscope|.
 

runtime/doc/usr_41.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 14
+*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 15
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -592,6 +592,7 @@ String manipulation:					*string-functions*
 	match()			position where a pattern matches in a string
 	matchend()		position where a pattern match ends in a string
 	matchstr()		match of a pattern in a string
+	matchstrpos()		match and postions of a pattern in a string
 	matchlist()		like matchstr() and also return submatches
 	stridx()		first index of a short string in a long string
 	strridx()		last index of a short string in a long string
@@ -889,9 +890,11 @@ Mappings:				    *mapping-functions*
 	wildmenumode()		check if the wildmode is active
 
 Testing:				    *test-functions*
-	assert_equal()       	assert that two expressions values are equal
+	assert_equal()		assert that two expressions values are equal
 	assert_false()		assert that an expression is false
 	assert_true()		assert that an expression is true
+	assert_exception()	assert that a command throws an exception
+	assert_fails()		assert that a function call fails
 
 Inter-process communication:
 	ch_open()		open a channel
@@ -932,7 +935,7 @@ Various:					*various-functions*
 	perleval()		evaluate Perl expression (|+perl|)
 	py3eval()		evaluate Python expression (|+python3|)
 	pyeval()		evaluate Python expression (|+python|)
-	wordcount()             get byte/word/char count of buffer
+	wordcount()		get byte/word/char count of buffer
 
 ==============================================================================
 *41.7*	Defining a function

runtime/doc/usr_toc.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_toc.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
+*usr_toc.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 25
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -104,10 +104,11 @@ Read this from start to end to learn the essential commands.
 		|05.1|	The vimrc file
 		|05.2|	The example vimrc file explained
 		|05.3|	Simple mappings
-		|05.4|	Adding a plugin
-		|05.5|	Adding a help file
-		|05.6|	The option window
-		|05.7|	Often used options
+		|05.4|	Adding a package
+		|05.5|	Adding a plugin
+		|05.6|	Adding a help file
+		|05.7|	The option window
+		|05.8|	Often used options
 
 |usr_06.txt|  Using syntax highlighting
 		|06.1|	Switching it on

runtime/doc/various.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 18
+*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Mar 20
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -411,7 +411,6 @@ m  *+ruby/dyn*		Ruby interface |ruby-dynamic| |/dyn|
 N  *+scrollbind*	|'scrollbind'|
 B  *+signs*		|:sign|
 N  *+smartindent*	|'smartindent'|
-m  *+sniff*		SniFF interface |sniff|
 N  *+startuptime*	|--startuptime| argument
 N  *+statusline*	Options 'statusline', 'rulerformat' and special
 			formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'
@@ -427,6 +426,7 @@ m  *+tcl/dyn*		Tcl interface |tcl-dynamic| |/dyn|
 N  *+termresponse*	support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|
 N  *+textobjects*	|text-objects| selection
    *+tgetent*		non-Unix only: able to use external termcap
+N  *+timers*		the |timer_start()| function
 N  *+title*		Setting the window 'title' and 'icon'
 N  *+toolbar*		|gui-toolbar|
 N  *+user_commands*	User-defined commands. |user-commands|

runtime/doc/version5.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version5.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 03
+*version5.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ Don't add "-L/usr/lib" to the link line, causes problems on a few systems.
 When compiling, allow a choice for minimal, normal or maximal features in an
 easy way, by changing a single line in src/feature.h.
 The DOS16 version has been compiled with minimal features to avoid running
-out of memory too quickly. |dos16|
+out of memory too quickly.
 The Win32, DJGPP, and OS/2 versions use maximal features, because they have
 enough memory.
 The Amiga version is available with normal and maximal features.

runtime/ftplugin/eiffel.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin
+" Language:	Eiffel
+" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	2010 Aug 29
+
+if (exists("b:did_ftplugin"))
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+setlocal comments=:--
+setlocal commentstring=--\ %s
+
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql
+
+if (has("gui_win32") || has("gui_gtk")) && !exists("b:browsefilter")
+  let b:browsefilter = "Eiffel Source Files (*.e)\t*.e\n" .
+		     \ "Eiffel Control Files (*.ecf, *.ace, *.xace)\t*.ecf;*.ace;*.xace\n" .
+		     \ "All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
+endif
+
+if exists("loaded_matchit") && !exists("b:match_words")
+  let b:match_ignorecase = 0
+  " Silly \%^ trick to match note at head of pair and in middle prevents
+  " 'g%' wrapping from 'note' to 'end'
+  let b:match_words = '\%^:' .
+		  \	'\<\%(^note\|indexing\|class\|^obsolete\|inherit\|insert\|^create\|convert\|feature\|^invariant\)\>:' .
+		  \   '^end\>,' .
+		  \   '\<\%(do\|deferred\|external\|once\%(\s\+"\)\@!\|check\|debug\|if\|inspect\|from\|across\)\>:' .
+		  \	'\%(\%(^\s\+\)\@<=\%(then\|until\|loop\)\|\%(then\|until\|loop\)\s\+[^ -]\|' .
+		  \	'\<\%(ensure\%(\s\+then\)\=\|rescue\|_then\|elseif\|else\|when\|\s\@<=invariant\|_until\|_loop\|variant\|_as\|alias\)\>\):' .
+		  \   '\s\@<=end\>'
+  let b:match_skip = 's:\<eiffel\%(Comment\|String\|Operator\)\>'
+  noremap  [% <Nop>
+  noremap  ]% <Nop>
+  vnoremap a% <Nop>
+endif
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl fo< com< cms<" .
+  \ "| unlet! b:browsefilter b:match_ignorecase b:match_words b:match_skip"
+
+if !exists("g:no_plugin_maps") && !exists("g:no_eiffel_maps")
+  function! s:DoMotion(pattern, count, flags) abort
+    normal! m'
+    for i in range(a:count)
+      call search(a:pattern, a:flags)
+    endfor
+  endfunction
+
+  let sections = '^\%(note\|indexing\|' .
+	     \	 '\%(\%(deferred\|expanded\|external\|frozen\)\s\+\)*class\|' .
+	     \	 'obsolete\|inherit\|insert\|create\|convert\|feature\|' .
+	     \	 'invariant\|end\)\>'
+
+  nnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]] :<C-U>call <SID>DoMotion(sections, v:count1, 'W')<CR>
+  xnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]] :<C-U>exe "normal! gv"<Bar>call <SID>DoMotion(sections, v:count1, 'W')<CR>
+  nnoremap <silent> <buffer> [[ :<C-U>call <SID>DoMotion(sections, v:count1, 'Wb')<CR>
+  xnoremap <silent> <buffer> [[ :<C-U>exe "normal! gv"<Bar>call <SID>DoMotion(sections, v:count1, 'Wb')<CR>
+
+  function! s:DoFeatureMotion(count, flags)
+    let view = winsaveview()
+    call cursor(1, 1)
+    let [features_start, _] = searchpos('^feature\>')
+    call search('^\s\+\a') " find the first feature
+    let spaces = indent(line('.'))
+    let [features_end, _] = searchpos('^\%(invariant\|note\|end\)\>')
+    call winrestview(view)
+    call s:DoMotion('\%>' . features_start . 'l\%<' . features_end . 'l^\s*\%' . (spaces + 1) . 'v\zs\a', a:count, a:flags)
+  endfunction
+
+  nnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]m :<C-U>call <SID>DoFeatureMotion(v:count1, 'W')<CR>
+  xnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]m :<C-U>exe "normal! gv"<Bar>call <SID>DoFeatureMotion(v:count1, 'W')<CR>
+  nnoremap <silent> <buffer> [m :<C-U>call <SID>DoFeatureMotion(v:count1, 'Wb')<CR>
+  xnoremap <silent> <buffer> [m :<C-U>exe "normal! gv"<Bar>call <SID>DoFeatureMotion(v:count1, 'Wb')<CR>
+
+  let comment_block_start = '^\%(\s\+--.*\n\)\@<!\s\+--'
+  let comment_block_end = '^\s\+--.*\n\%(\s\+--\)\@!'
+
+  nnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]- :<C-U>call <SID>DoMotion(comment_block_start, 1, 'W')<CR>
+  xnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]- :<C-U>exe "normal! gv"<Bar>call <SID>DoMotion(comment_block_start, 1, 'W')<CR>
+  nnoremap <silent> <buffer> [- :<C-U>call <SID>DoMotion(comment_block_end, 1, 'Wb')<CR>
+  xnoremap <silent> <buffer> [- :<C-U>exe "normal! gv"<Bar>call <SID>DoMotion(comment_block_end, 1, 'Wb')<CR>
+
+  let b:undo_ftplugin = b:undo_ftplugin .
+    \ "| silent! execute 'unmap <buffer> [[' | silent! execute 'unmap <buffer> ]]'" .
+    \ "| silent! execute 'unmap <buffer> [m' | silent! execute 'unmap <buffer> ]m'" .
+    \ "| silent! execute 'unmap <buffer> [-' | silent! execute 'unmap <buffer> ]-'"
+endif
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
+
+" vim: nowrap sw=2 sts=2 ts=8

runtime/ftplugin/r.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language: R
 " Maintainer: Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	Sun Feb 23, 2014  04:07PM
+" Homepage: https://github.com/jalvesaq/R-Vim-runtime
+" Last Change:	Tue Apr 07, 2015  04:38PM
 
 " Only do this when not yet done for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")

runtime/ftplugin/rhelp.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language: R help file
 " Maintainer: Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  06:23PM
+" Homepage: https://github.com/jalvesaq/R-Vim-runtime
+" Last Change:	Tue Apr 07, 2015  04:37PM
 
 " Only do this when not yet done for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")

runtime/ftplugin/rmd.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language: R help file
 " Maintainer: Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  06:23PM
+" Homepage: https://github.com/jalvesaq/R-Vim-runtime
+" Last Change:	Tue Apr 07, 2015  04:37PM
 " Original work by Alex Zvoleff (adjusted for rmd by Michel Kuhlmann)
 
 " Only do this when not yet done for this buffer

runtime/ftplugin/rnoweb.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language: Rnoweb
 " Maintainer: Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  06:23PM
+" Homepage: https://github.com/jalvesaq/R-Vim-runtime
+" Last Change:	Tue Apr 07, 2015  04:37PM
 
 " Only do this when not yet done for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")

runtime/ftplugin/rrst.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language: reStructuredText documentation format with R code
 " Maintainer: Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  06:23PM
+" Homepage: https://github.com/jalvesaq/R-Vim-runtime
+" Last Change:	Tue Apr 07, 2015  04:38PM
 " Original work by Alex Zvoleff
 
 " Only do this when not yet done for this buffer

runtime/indent/r.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	R
 " Author:	Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	Thu Mar 26, 2015  05:36PM
+" Homepage:     https://github.com/jalvesaq/R-Vim-runtime
+" Last Change:	Thu Feb 18, 2016  06:32AM
 
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
@@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ if ! exists("g:r_indent_ess_compatible")
   let g:r_indent_ess_compatible = 0
 endif
 if ! exists("g:r_indent_op_pattern")
-  let g:r_indent_op_pattern = '\(+\|-\|\*\|/\|=\|\~\|%\)$'
+  let g:r_indent_op_pattern = '\(&\||\|+\|-\|\*\|/\|=\|\~\|%\|->\)\s*$'
 endif
 
 function s:RDelete_quotes(line)
@@ -265,7 +266,7 @@ function GetRIndent()
     return 0
   endif
 
-  if cline =~ '^\s*{'
+  if cline =~ '^\s*{' && s:Get_paren_balance(cline, '{', '}') > 0
     if g:r_indent_ess_compatible && line =~ ')$'
       let nlnum = lnum
       let nline = line
@@ -283,7 +284,7 @@ function GetRIndent()
   endif
 
   " line is an incomplete command:
-  if line =~ '\<\(if\|while\|for\|function\)\s*()$' || line =~ '\<else$' || line =~ '<-$'
+  if line =~ '\<\(if\|while\|for\|function\)\s*()$' || line =~ '\<else$' || line =~ '<-$' || line =~ '->$'
     return indent(lnum) + &sw
   endif
 
@@ -344,7 +345,7 @@ function GetRIndent()
   endif
 
   let post_block = 0
-  if line =~ '}$'
+  if line =~ '}$' && s:Get_paren_balance(line, '{', '}') < 0
     let lnum = s:Get_matching_brace(lnum, '{', '}', 0)
     let line = SanitizeRLine(getline(lnum))
     if lnum > 0 && line =~ '^\s*{'
@@ -359,14 +360,14 @@ function GetRIndent()
   let olnum = s:Get_prev_line(lnum)
   let oline = getline(olnum)
   if olnum > 0
-    if line =~ g:r_indent_op_pattern
-      if oline =~ g:r_indent_op_pattern
+    if line =~ g:r_indent_op_pattern && s:Get_paren_balance(line, "(", ")") == 0
+      if oline =~ g:r_indent_op_pattern && s:Get_paren_balance(line, "(", ")") == 0
         return indent(lnum)
       else
         return indent(lnum) + &sw
       endif
     else
-      if oline =~ g:r_indent_op_pattern
+      if oline =~ g:r_indent_op_pattern && s:Get_paren_balance(line, "(", ")") == 0
         return indent(lnum) - &sw
       endif
     endif
@@ -471,7 +472,6 @@ function GetRIndent()
   endif
 
   let ind = indent(lnum)
-  let pind = indent(plnum)
 
   if g:r_indent_align_args == 0 && pb != 0
     let ind += pb * &sw
@@ -483,6 +483,12 @@ function GetRIndent()
     return ind
   endif
 
+  if plnum > 0
+    let pind = indent(plnum)
+  else
+    let pind = 0
+  endif
+
   if ind == pind || (ind == (pind  + &sw) && pline =~ '{$' && ppost_else == 0)
     return ind
   endif

runtime/indent/rhelp.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	R Documentation (Help), *.Rd
 " Author:	Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	Thu Oct 16, 2014  07:07AM
+" Homepage:     https://github.com/jalvesaq/R-Vim-runtime
+" Last Change:	Tue Apr 07, 2015  04:38PM
 
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.

runtime/indent/rmd.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	Rmd
 " Author:	Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	Thu Jul 10, 2014  07:11PM
+" Homepage:     https://github.com/jalvesaq/R-Vim-runtime
+" Last Change:	Tue Apr 07, 2015  04:38PM
 
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.

runtime/indent/rnoweb.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	Rnoweb
 " Author:	Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	Sun Mar 22, 2015  09:28AM
+" Homepage:     https://github.com/jalvesaq/R-Vim-runtime
+" Last Change:	Tue Apr 07, 2015  04:38PM
 
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.

runtime/indent/rrst.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	Rrst
 " Author:	Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  07:33PM
+" Homepage:     https://github.com/jalvesaq/R-Vim-runtime
+" Last Change:	Tue Apr 07, 2015  04:38PM
 
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.

runtime/indent/sh.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Maintainer:          Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
 " Previous Maintainer: Peter Aronoff <telemachus@arpinum.org>
 " Original Author:     Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
-" Latest Revision:     2016-01-15
+" Latest Revision:     2016-02-15
 " License:             Vim (see :h license)
 " Repository:          https://github.com/chrisbra/vim-sh-indent
 
@@ -12,14 +12,14 @@ if exists("b:did_indent")
 endif
 let b:did_indent = 1
 
-let b:undo_indent = 'setlocal indentexpr< indentkeys< smartindent<'
-
 setlocal indentexpr=GetShIndent()
 setlocal indentkeys+=0=then,0=do,0=else,0=elif,0=fi,0=esac,0=done,0=end,),0=;;,0=;&
 setlocal indentkeys+=0=fin,0=fil,0=fip,0=fir,0=fix
 setlocal indentkeys-=:,0#
 setlocal nosmartindent
 
+let b:undo_indent = 'setlocal indentexpr< indentkeys< smartindent<'
+
 if exists("*GetShIndent")
   finish
 endif
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ function! GetShIndent()
     if !s:is_case_ended(line)
       let ind += s:indent_value('case-statements')
     endif
-  elseif line =~ '^\s*\<\k\+\>\s*()\s*{' || line =~ '^\s*{'
+  elseif line =~ '^\s*\<\k\+\>\s*()\s*{' || line =~ '^\s*{' || line =~ '^\s*function\s*\w\S\+\s*\%(()\)\?\s*{'
     if line !~ '}\s*\%(#.*\)\=$'
       let ind += s:indent_value('default')
     endif

runtime/indent/tex.vim

@@ -2,10 +2,9 @@
 " Language:     LaTeX
 " Maintainer:   YiChao Zhou <broken.zhou AT gmail.com>
 " Created:      Sat, 16 Feb 2002 16:50:19 +0100
-" Last Change:	2012 Mar 18 19:19:50
-" Version: 0.7
-"   Please email me if you found something we can do.  Bug report and
-"   feature request is welcome.
+" Version: 0.9.2
+"   Please email me if you found something I can do.  Comments, bug report and
+"   feature request are welcome.
 
 " Last Update:  {{{
 "               25th Sep 2002, by LH :
@@ -41,7 +40,7 @@
 "               (*) Trust user when in "verbatim" and "lstlisting"
 "               2012/03/11 by Zhou Yichao <broken.zhou AT gmail.com>
 "               (*) Modify "&" so that only indent when current line start with
-"               "&".
+"                   "&".
 "               2012/03/12 by Zhou Yichao <broken.zhou AT gmail.com>
 "               (*) Modify indentkeys.
 "               2012/03/18 by Zhou Yichao <broken.zhou AT gmail.com>
@@ -49,6 +48,17 @@
 "               2013/05/02 by Zhou Yichao <broken.zhou AT gmail.com>
 "               (*) Fix problem about GetTeXIndent checker. Thank Albert Netymk
 "                   for reporting this.
+"               2014/06/23 by Zhou Yichao <broken.zhou AT gmail.com>
+"               (*) Remove the feature g:tex_indent_and because it is buggy.
+"               (*) If there is not any obvious indentation hints, we do not
+"                   alert our user's current indentation.
+"               (*) g:tex_indent_brace now only works if the open brace is the
+"                   last character of that line.
+"               2014/08/03 by Zhou Yichao <broken.zhou AT gmail.com>
+"               (*) Indent current line if last line has larger indentation
+"               2014/08/09 by Zhou Yichao <broken.zhou AT gmail.com>
+"               (*) Add missing return value for s:GetEndIndentation(...)
+"
 " }}}
 
 " Document: {{{
@@ -60,7 +70,17 @@
 " * g:tex_indent_brace
 "
 "   If this variable is unset or non-zero, it will use smartindent-like style
-"   for "{}" and "[]"
+"   for "{}" and "[]".  Now this only works if the open brace is the last
+"   character of that line.
+"
+"         % Example 1
+"         \usetikzlibrary{
+"           external
+"         }
+"
+"         % Example 2
+"         \tikzexternalize[
+"           prefix=tikz]
 "   
 " * g:tex_indent_items
 "
@@ -98,14 +118,6 @@
 "
 "   A list of environment names. separated with '\|', where no indentation is 
 "   required. The default is 'document\|verbatim'.
-"
-" * g:tex_indent_and
-"
-"   If this variable is unset or zero, vim will try to align the line with first
-"   "&". This is pretty useful when you use environment like table or align.
-"   Note that this feature need to search back some line, so vim may become
-"   a little slow.
-"
 " }}} 
 
 " Only define the function once
@@ -126,8 +138,8 @@ endif
 if !exists("g:tex_indent_brace")
     let g:tex_indent_brace = 1
 endif
-if !exists("g:tex_indent_and")
-    let g:tex_indent_and = 1
+if !exists("g:tex_max_scan_line")
+    let g:tex_max_scan_line = 60
 endif
 if g:tex_indent_items
     if !exists("g:tex_itemize_env")
@@ -140,10 +152,6 @@ else
     let g:tex_items = ''
 endif
 
-if !exists("g:tex_indent_paretheses")
-    let g:tex_indent_paretheses = 1
-endif
-
 if !exists("g:tex_noindent_env")
     let g:tex_noindent_env = 'document\|verbatim\|lstlisting'
 endif "}}}
@@ -160,6 +168,7 @@ let g:tex_items = '^\s*' . substitute(g:tex_items, '^\(\^\\s\*\)*', '', '')
 function! GetTeXIndent() " {{{
     " Find a non-blank line above the current line.
     let lnum = prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1)
+    let cnum = v:lnum
 
     " Comment line is not what we need.
     while lnum != 0 && getline(lnum) =~ '^\s*%'
@@ -171,8 +180,8 @@ function! GetTeXIndent() " {{{
         return 0 
     endif
 
-    let line = substitute(getline(lnum), '%.*', ' ','g')     " last line
-    let cline = substitute(getline(v:lnum), '%.*', ' ', 'g') " current line
+    let line = substitute(getline(lnum), '\s*%.*', '','g')     " last line
+    let cline = substitute(getline(v:lnum), '\s*%.*', '', 'g') " current line
 
     "  We are in verbatim, so do what our user what.
     if synIDattr(synID(v:lnum, indent(v:lnum), 1), "name") == "texZone"
@@ -183,26 +192,12 @@ function! GetTeXIndent() " {{{
         end
     endif
     
-    " You want to align with "&"
-    if g:tex_indent_and
-        " Align only when current line start with "&"
-        if line =~ '&.*\\\\' && cline =~ '^\s*&'
-            return indent(v:lnum) + stridx(line, "&") - stridx(cline, "&")
-        endif
-
-        " set line & lnum to the line which doesn't contain "&"
-        while lnum != 0 && (stridx(line, "&") != -1 || line =~ '^\s*%')
-            let lnum = prevnonblank(lnum - 1)
-            let line = getline(lnum)
-        endwhile
-    endif
-
-
     if lnum == 0
         return 0 
     endif
 
     let ind = indent(lnum)
+    let stay = 1
 
     " New code for comment: retain the indent of current line
     if cline =~ '^\s*%'
@@ -216,77 +211,197 @@ function! GetTeXIndent() " {{{
     " ZYC modification : \end after \begin won't cause wrong indent anymore
     if line =~ '\\begin{.*}' && line !~ g:tex_noindent_env
         let ind = ind + &sw
+        let stay = 0
 
         if g:tex_indent_items
             " Add another sw for item-environments
             if line =~ g:tex_itemize_env
                 let ind = ind + &sw
+                let stay = 0
             endif
         endif
     endif
 
+    if cline =~ '\\end{.*}'
+        let retn = s:GetEndIndentation(v:lnum)
+        if retn != -1
+            return retn
+        endif
+    end
     " Subtract a 'shiftwidth' when an environment ends
-    if cline =~ '\\end{.*}' && cline !~ g:tex_noindent_env
-
+    if cline =~ '\\end{.*}'
+                \ && cline !~ g:tex_noindent_env
+                \ && cline !~ '\\begin{.*}.*\\end{.*}'
         if g:tex_indent_items
             " Remove another sw for item-environments
             if cline =~ g:tex_itemize_env
                 let ind = ind - &sw
+                let stay = 0
             endif
         endif
 
         let ind = ind - &sw
+        let stay = 0
     endif
 
     if g:tex_indent_brace
-        let sum1 = 0
-        for i in range(0, strlen(line)-1)
-            if line[i] == "}" || line[i] == "]" ||
-                        \ strpart(line, i, 7) == '\right)'
-                let sum1 = max([0, sum1-1])
-            endif
-            if line[i] == "{" || line[i] == "[" ||
-                        \ strpart(line, i, 6) == '\left('
-                let sum1 += 1
+        let char = line[strlen(line)-1]
+        if char == '[' || char == '{'
+            let ind += &sw
+            let stay = 0
+        endif
+
+        let cind = indent(v:lnum)
+        let char = cline[cind]
+        if (char == ']' || char == '}') &&
+                    \ s:CheckPairedIsLastCharacter(v:lnum, cind)
+            let ind -= &sw
+            let stay = 0
+        endif
+
+        for i in range(indent(lnum)+1, strlen(line)-1)
+            let char = line[i]
+            if char == ']' || char == '}'
+                if s:CheckPairedIsLastCharacter(lnum, i)
+                    let ind -= &sw
+                    let stay = 0
+                endif
             endif
         endfor
-
-        let sum2 = 0
-        for i in reverse(range(0, strlen(cline)-1))
-            if cline[i] == "{" || cline[i] == "[" ||
-                        \ strpart(cline, i, 6) == '\left('
-                let sum2 = max([0, sum2-1])
-            endif
-            if cline[i] == "}" || cline[i] == "]" ||
-                        \ strpart(cline, i, 7) == '\right)'
-                let sum2 += 1
-            endif
-        endfor
-
-        let ind += (sum1 - sum2) * &sw
-    endif
-
-    if g:tex_indent_paretheses
     endif
 
     " Special treatment for 'item'
     " ----------------------------
 
     if g:tex_indent_items
-
         " '\item' or '\bibitem' itself:
         if cline =~ g:tex_items
             let ind = ind - &sw
+            let stay = 0
         endif
-
         " lines following to '\item' are intented once again:
         if line =~ g:tex_items
             let ind = ind + &sw
+            let stay = 0
         endif
-
     endif
 
-    return ind
+    if stay
+        " If there is no obvious indentation hint, we trust our user.
+        if empty(cline)
+            return ind
+        else
+            return max([indent(v:lnum), s:GetLastBeginIndentation(v:lnum)])
+        endif
+    else
+        return ind
+    endif
+endfunction "}}}
+
+function! s:GetLastBeginIndentation(lnum) " {{{
+    let matchend = 1
+    for lnum in range(a:lnum-1, max([a:lnum - g:tex_max_scan_line, 1]), -1)
+        let line = getline(lnum)
+        if line =~ '\\end{.*}'
+            let matchend += 1
+        endif
+        if line =~ '\\begin{.*}'
+            let matchend -= 1
+        endif
+        if matchend == 0
+            if line =~ g:tex_itemize_env
+                return indent(lnum) + 2 * &sw
+            endif
+            if line =~ g:tex_noindent_env
+                return indent(lnum)
+            endif
+            return indent(lnum) + &sw
+        endif
+    endfor
+    return -1
+endfunction
+
+function! s:GetEndIndentation(lnum) " {{{
+    if getline(a:lnum) =~ '\\begin{.*}.*\\end{.*}'
+        return -1
+    endif
+
+    let min_indent = 100
+    let matchend = 1
+    for lnum in range(a:lnum-1, max([a:lnum-g:tex_max_scan_line, 1]), -1)
+        let line = getline(lnum)
+        if line =~ '\\end{.*}'
+            let matchend += 1
+        endif
+        if line =~ '\\begin{.*}'
+            let matchend -= 1
+        endif
+        if matchend == 0
+            return indent(lnum)
+        endif
+        if !empty(line)
+            let min_indent = min([min_indent, indent(lnum)])
+        endif
+    endfor
+    return min_indent - &sw
+endfunction
+
+" Most of the code is from matchparen.vim
+function! s:CheckPairedIsLastCharacter(lnum, col) "{{{
+    " Get the character under the cursor and check if it's in 'matchpairs'.
+    let c_lnum = a:lnum
+    let c_col = a:col+1
+
+
+    let c = getline(c_lnum)[c_col-1]
+    let plist = split(&matchpairs, '.\zs[:,]')
+    let i = index(plist, c)
+    if i < 0
+        return 0
+    endif
+
+    " Figure out the arguments for searchpairpos().
+    if i % 2 == 0
+        let s_flags = 'nW'
+        let c2 = plist[i + 1]
+    else
+        let s_flags = 'nbW'
+        let c2 = c
+        let c = plist[i - 1]
+    endif
+    if c == '['
+        let c = '\['
+        let c2 = '\]'
+    endif
+
+    " Find the match.  When it was just before the cursor move it there for a
+    " moment.
+    let save_cursor = winsaveview()
+    call cursor(c_lnum, c_col)
+
+    " When not in a string or comment ignore matches inside them.
+    " We match "escape" for special items, such as lispEscapeSpecial.
+    let s_skip ='synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") ' .
+                \ '=~?  "string\\|character\\|singlequote\\|escape\\|comment"'
+    execute 'if' s_skip '| let s_skip = 0 | endif'
+
+    let stopline = max([0, c_lnum - g:tex_max_scan_line])
+
+    " Limit the search time to 300 msec to avoid a hang on very long lines.
+    " This fails when a timeout is not supported.
+    try
+        let [m_lnum, m_col] = searchpairpos(c, '', c2, s_flags, s_skip, stopline, 100)
+    catch /E118/
+    endtry
+
+    call winrestview(save_cursor)
+
+    if m_lnum > 0
+        let line = getline(m_lnum)
+        return strlen(line) == m_col
+    endif
+
+    return 0
 endfunction "}}}
 
 let &cpo = s:cpo_save

runtime/macros/README.txt

@@ -8,23 +8,26 @@ maze	Macros that solve a maze (amazing!).
 urm	Macros that simulate a simple computer: "Universal Register Machine"
 
 
+
 The other files contain some handy utilities.  They also serve as examples for
 how to use Vi and Vim functionality.
 
-dvorak			for when you use a Dvorak keyboard
-
-justify.vim		user function for justifying text
-
-matchit.vim + matchit.txt  make % match if-fi, HTML tags, and much more
-
 less.sh + less.vim	make Vim work like less (or more)
 
-shellmenu.vim		menus for editing shell scripts in the GUI version
 
-swapmous.vim		swap left and right mouse buttons
 
-editexisting.vim	when editing a file that is already edited with
-			another Vim instance
+The following have been moved to an optional package.  Add the command to your
+vimrc file to use the package:
 
-This one is only for Unix.  It can be found in the extra archive:
-file_select.vim		macros that make a handy file selector
+packadd! dvorak		" Dvorak keyboard support; adds mappings
+
+packadd! editexisting	" when editing a file that is already edited with
+			" another Vim instance, go to that Vim instance
+
+packadd! justify	" justifying text.
+
+packadd! matchit	" makes the % command work better
+
+packadd! shellmenu	" menus for editing shell scripts in the GUI version
+
+packadd! swapmouse	" swap left and right mouse buttons

runtime/macros/dvorak

@@ -1,164 +0,0 @@
-When using a dvorak keyboard this file may be of help to you.
-These mappings have been made by Lawrence Kesteloot <kesteloo@cs.unc.edu>.
-What they do is that the most often used keys, like hjkl, are put in a more
-easy to use position.
-It may take some time to learn using this.
-
-Put these lines in your .vimrc:
--=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-" Key to go into dvorak mode:
-map ,d :source ~/.dvorak
-" Key to get out of dvorak mode:
-map ,q :source ~/.qwerty
--=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-
-write these lines into the file ~/.dvorak:
--=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-" Dvorak keyboard, only in insert mode and ex mode.
-" You may want to add a list of map's too.
-imap! a a
-imap! b x
-imap! c j
-imap! d e
-imap! e .
-imap! f u
-imap! g i
-imap! h d
-imap! i c
-imap! j h
-imap! k t
-imap! l n
-imap! m m
-imap! n b
-imap! o r
-imap! p l
-imap! q '
-imap! r p
-imap! s o
-imap! t y
-imap! u g
-imap! v k
-imap! w ,
-imap! x q
-imap! y f
-imap! z ;
-imap! ; s
-imap! ' -
-imap! " _
-imap! , w
-imap! . v
-imap! / z
-imap! A A
-imap! B X
-imap! C J
-imap! D E
-imap! E >
-imap! F U
-imap! G I
-imap! H D
-imap! I C
-imap! J H
-imap! K T
-imap! L N
-imap! M M
-imap! N B
-imap! O R
-imap! P L
-imap! Q "
-imap! R P
-imap! S O
-imap! T Y
-imap! U G
-imap! V K
-imap! W <
-imap! X Q
-imap! Y F
-imap! Z :
-imap! < W
-imap! > V
-imap! ? Z
-imap! : S
-imap! [ /
-imap! ] =
-imap! { ?
-imap! } +
-imap! - [
-imap! _ {
-imap! = ]
-imap! + }
--=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-
-write these lines into the file ~/.qwerty
--=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-" Qwerty keyboard
-unmap! a
-unmap! b
-unmap! c
-unmap! d
-unmap! e
-unmap! f
-unmap! g
-unmap! h
-unmap! i
-unmap! j
-unmap! k
-unmap! l
-unmap! m
-unmap! n
-unmap! o
-unmap! p
-unmap! q
-unmap! r
-unmap! s
-unmap! t
-unmap! u
-unmap! v
-unmap! w
-unmap! x
-unmap! y
-unmap! z
-unmap! ;
-unmap! '
-unmap! \"
-unmap! ,
-unmap! .
-unmap! /
-unmap! A
-unmap! B
-unmap! C
-unmap! D
-unmap! E
-unmap! F
-unmap! G
-unmap! H
-unmap! I
-unmap! J
-unmap! K
-unmap! L
-unmap! M
-unmap! N
-unmap! O
-unmap! P
-unmap! Q
-unmap! R
-unmap! S
-unmap! T
-unmap! U
-unmap! V
-unmap! W
-unmap! X
-unmap! Y
-unmap! Z
-unmap! <
-unmap! >
-unmap! ?
-unmap! :
-unmap! [
-unmap! ]
-unmap! {
-unmap! }
-unmap! -
-unmap! _
-unmap! =
-unmap! +
--=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-

runtime/macros/editexisting.vim

@@ -1,119 +1,3 @@
-" Vim Plugin:	Edit the file with an existing Vim if possible
-" Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar
-" Last Change:	2014 Dec 06
-
-" This is a plugin, drop it in your (Unix) ~/.vim/plugin or (Win32)
-" $VIM/vimfiles/plugin directory.  Or make a symbolic link, so that you
-" automatically use the latest version.
-
-" This plugin serves two purposes:
-" 1. On startup, if we were invoked with one file name argument and the file
-"    is not modified then try to find another Vim instance that is editing
-"    this file.  If there is one then bring it to the foreground and exit.
-" 2. When a file is edited and a swap file exists for it, try finding that
-"    other Vim and bring it to the foreground.  Requires Vim 7, because it
-"    uses the SwapExists autocommand event.
-if v:version < 700
-  finish
-endif
-
-" Function that finds the Vim instance that is editing "filename" and brings
-" it to the foreground.
-func s:EditElsewhere(filename)
-  let fname_esc = substitute(a:filename, "'", "''", "g")
-
-  let servers = serverlist()
-  while servers != ''
-    " Get next server name in "servername"; remove it from "servers".
-    let i = match(servers, "\n")
-    if i == -1
-      let servername = servers
-      let servers = ''
-    else
-      let servername = strpart(servers, 0, i)
-      let servers = strpart(servers, i + 1)
-    endif
-
-    " Skip ourselves.
-    if servername ==? v:servername
-      continue
-    endif
-
-    " Check if this server is editing our file.
-    if remote_expr(servername, "bufloaded('" . fname_esc . "')")
-      " Yes, bring it to the foreground.
-      if has("win32")
-	call remote_foreground(servername)
-      endif
-      call remote_expr(servername, "foreground()")
-
-      if remote_expr(servername, "exists('*EditExisting')")
-	" Make sure the file is visible in a window (not hidden).
-	" If v:swapcommand exists and is set, send it to the server.
-	if exists("v:swapcommand")
-	  let c = substitute(v:swapcommand, "'", "''", "g")
-	  call remote_expr(servername, "EditExisting('" . fname_esc . "', '" . c . "')")
-	else
-	  call remote_expr(servername, "EditExisting('" . fname_esc . "', '')")
-	endif
-      endif
-
-      if !(has('vim_starting') && has('gui_running') && has('gui_win32'))
-	" Tell the user what is happening.  Not when the GUI is starting
-	" though, it would result in a message box.
-	echomsg "File is being edited by " . servername
-	sleep 2
-      endif
-      return 'q'
-    endif
-  endwhile
-  return ''
-endfunc
-
-" When the plugin is loaded and there is one file name argument: Find another
-" Vim server that is editing this file right now.
-if argc() == 1 && !&modified
-  if s:EditElsewhere(expand("%:p")) == 'q'
-    quit
-  endif
-endif
-
-" Setup for handling the situation that an existing swap file is found.
-try
-  au! SwapExists * let v:swapchoice = s:EditElsewhere(expand("<afile>:p"))
-catch
-  " Without SwapExists we don't do anything for ":edit" commands
-endtry
-
-" Function used on the server to make the file visible and possibly execute a
-" command.
-func! EditExisting(fname, command)
-  " Get the window number of the file in the current tab page.
-  let winnr = bufwinnr(a:fname)
-  if winnr <= 0
-    " Not found, look in other tab pages.
-    let bufnr = bufnr(a:fname)
-    for i in range(tabpagenr('$'))
-      if index(tabpagebuflist(i + 1), bufnr) >= 0
-	" Make this tab page the current one and find the window number.
-	exe 'tabnext ' . (i + 1)
-	let winnr = bufwinnr(a:fname)
-	break
-      endif
-    endfor
-  endif
-
-  if winnr > 0
-    exe winnr . "wincmd w"
-  elseif exists('*fnameescape')
-    exe "split " . fnameescape(a:fname)
-  else
-    exe "split " . escape(a:fname, " \t\n*?[{`$\\%#'\"|!<")
-  endif
-
-  if a:command != ''
-    exe "normal! " . a:command
-  endif
-
-  redraw
-endfunc
+" Load the editexisting package.
+" For those users who were loading the editexisting plugin from here.
+packadd editexisting

runtime/macros/justify.vim

@@ -1,316 +1,3 @@
-" Function to left and right align text.
-"
-" Written by:	Preben "Peppe" Guldberg <c928400@student.dtu.dk>
-" Created:	980806 14:13 (or around that time anyway)
-" Revised:	001103 00:36 (See "Revisions" below)
-
-
-" function Justify( [ textwidth [, maxspaces [, indent] ] ] )
-"
-" Justify()  will  left  and  right  align  a  line  by  filling  in  an
-" appropriate amount of spaces.  Extra  spaces  are  added  to  existing
-" spaces starting from the right side of the line.  As an  example,  the
-" following documentation has been justified.
-"
-" The function takes the following arguments:
-
-" textwidth argument
-" ------------------
-" If not specified, the value of the 'textwidth'  option  is  used.   If
-" 'textwidth' is zero a value of 80 is used.
-"
-" Additionally the arguments 'tw' and '' are  accepted.   The  value  of
-" 'textwidth' will be used. These are handy, if you just want to specify
-" the maxspaces argument.
-
-" maxspaces argument
-" ------------------
-" If specified, alignment will only be done, if the  longest  space  run
-" after alignment is no longer than maxspaces.
-"
-" An argument of '' is accepted, should the user  like  to  specify  all
-" arguments.
-"
-" To aid user defined commands, negative  values  are  accepted  aswell.
-" Using a negative value specifies the default behaviour: any length  of
-" space runs will be used to justify the text.
-
-" indent argument
-" ---------------
-" This argument specifies how a line should be indented. The default  is
-" to keep the current indentation.
-"
-" Negative  values:  Keep  current   amount   of   leading   whitespace.
-" Positive values: Indent all lines with leading whitespace  using  this
-" amount of whitespace.
-"
-" Note that the value 0, needs to be quoted as  a  string.   This  value
-" leads to a left flushed text.
-"
-" Additionally units of  'shiftwidth'/'sw'  and  'tabstop'/'ts'  may  be
-" added. In this case, if the value of indent is positive, the amount of
-" whitespace to be  added  will  be  multiplied  by  the  value  of  the
-" 'shiftwidth' and 'tabstop' settings.  If these  units  are  used,  the
-"  argument must  be  given  as  a  string,  eg.   Justify('','','2sw').
-"
-" If the values of 'sw' or 'tw' are negative, they  are  treated  as  if
-" they were 0, which means that the text is flushed left.  There  is  no
-" check if a negative number prefix is used to  change  the  sign  of  a
-" negative 'sw' or 'ts' value.
-"
-" As with the other arguments,  ''  may  be  used  to  get  the  default
-" behaviour.
-
-
-" Notes:
-"
-" If the line, adjusted for space runs and leading/trailing  whitespace,
-" is wider than the used textwidth, the line will be left untouched  (no
-" whitespace removed).  This should be equivalent to  the  behaviour  of
-" :left, :right and :center.
-"
-" If the resulting line is shorter than the used textwidth  it  is  left
-" untouched.
-"
-" All space runs in the line  are  truncated  before  the  alignment  is
-" carried out.
-"
-" If you have set 'noexpandtab', :retab!  is used to replace space  runs
-"  with whitespace  using  the  value  of  'tabstop'.   This  should  be
-" conformant with :left, :right and :center.
-"
-" If joinspaces is set, an extra space is added after '.', '?' and  '!'.
-" If 'cpooptions' include 'j', extra space  is  only  added  after  '.'.
-" (This may on occasion conflict with maxspaces.)
-
-
-" Related mappings:
-"
-" Mappings that will align text using the current text width,  using  at
-" most four spaces in a  space  run  and  keeping  current  indentation.
-nmap _j :%call Justify('tw',4)<CR>
-vmap _j :call Justify('tw',4)<CR>
-"
-" Mappings that will remove space runs and format lines (might be useful
-" prior to aligning the text).
-nmap ,gq :%s/\s\+/ /g<CR>gq1G
-vmap ,gq :s/\s\+/ /g<CR>gvgq
-
-
-" User defined command:
-"
-" The following is an ex command that works as a shortcut to the Justify
-" function.  Arguments to Justify() can  be  added  after  the  command.
-com! -range -nargs=* Justify <line1>,<line2>call Justify(<f-args>)
-"
-" The following commands are all equivalent:
-"
-" 1. Simplest use of Justify():
-"       :call Justify()
-"       :Justify
-"
-" 2. The _j mapping above via the ex command:
-"       :%Justify tw 4
-"
-" 3.  Justify  visualised  text  at  72nd  column  while  indenting  all
-" previously indented text two shiftwidths
-"       :'<,'>call Justify(72,'','2sw')
-"       :'<,'>Justify 72 -1 2sw
-"
-" This documentation has been justified  using  the  following  command:
-":se et|kz|1;/^" function Justify(/+,'z-g/^" /s/^" //|call Justify(70,3)|s/^/" /
-
-" Revisions:
-" 001103: If 'joinspaces' was set, calculations could be wrong.
-"	  Tabs at start of line could also lead to errors.
-"	  Use setline() instead of "exec 's/foo/bar/' - safer.
-"	  Cleaned up the code a bit.
-"
-" Todo:	  Convert maps to the new script specific form
-
-" Error function
-function! Justify_error(message)
-    echohl Error
-    echo "Justify([tw, [maxspaces [, indent]]]): " . a:message
-    echohl None
-endfunction
-
-
-" Now for the real thing
-function! Justify(...) range
-
-    if a:0 > 3
-    call Justify_error("Too many arguments (max 3)")
-    return 1
-    endif
-
-    " Set textwidth (accept 'tw' and '' as arguments)
-    if a:0 >= 1
-	if a:1 =~ '^\(tw\)\=$'
-	    let tw = &tw
-	elseif a:1 =~ '^\d\+$'
-	    let tw = a:1
-	else
-	    call Justify_error("tw must be a number (>0), '' or 'tw'")
-	    return 2
-	endif
-    else
-	let tw = &tw
-    endif
-    if tw == 0
-	let tw = 80
-    endif
-
-    " Set maximum number of spaces between WORDs
-    if a:0 >= 2
-	if a:2 == ''
-	    let maxspaces = tw
-	elseif a:2 =~ '^-\d\+$'
-	    let maxspaces = tw
-	elseif a:2 =~ '^\d\+$'
-	    let maxspaces = a:2
-	else
-	    call Justify_error("maxspaces must be a number or ''")
-	    return 3
-	endif
-    else
-	let maxspaces = tw
-    endif
-    if maxspaces <= 1
-	call Justify_error("maxspaces should be larger than 1")
-	return 4
-    endif
-
-    " Set the indentation style (accept sw and ts units)
-    let indent_fix = ''
-    if a:0 >= 3
-	if (a:3 == '') || a:3 =~ '^-[1-9]\d*\(shiftwidth\|sw\|tabstop\|ts\)\=$'
-	    let indent = -1
-	elseif a:3 =~ '^-\=0\(shiftwidth\|sw\|tabstop\|ts\)\=$'
-	    let indent = 0
-	elseif a:3 =~ '^\d\+\(shiftwidth\|sw\|tabstop\|ts\)\=$'
-	    let indent = substitute(a:3, '\D', '', 'g')
-	elseif a:3 =~ '^\(shiftwidth\|sw\|tabstop\|ts\)$'
-	    let indent = 1
-	else
-	    call Justify_error("indent: a number with 'sw'/'ts' unit")
-	    return 5
-	endif
-	if indent >= 0
-	    while indent > 0
-		let indent_fix = indent_fix . ' '
-		let indent = indent - 1
-	    endwhile
-	    let indent_sw = 0
-	    if a:3 =~ '\(shiftwidth\|sw\)'
-		let indent_sw = &sw
-	    elseif a:3 =~ '\(tabstop\|ts\)'
-		let indent_sw = &ts
-	    endif
-	    let indent_fix2 = ''
-	    while indent_sw > 0
-		let indent_fix2 = indent_fix2 . indent_fix
-		let indent_sw = indent_sw - 1
-	    endwhile
-	    let indent_fix = indent_fix2
-	endif
-    else
-	let indent = -1
-    endif
-
-    " Avoid substitution reports
-    let save_report = &report
-    set report=1000000
-
-    " Check 'joinspaces' and 'cpo'
-    if &js == 1
-	if &cpo =~ 'j'
-	    let join_str = '\(\. \)'
-	else
-	    let join_str = '\([.!?!] \)'
-	endif
-    endif
-
-    let cur = a:firstline
-    while cur <= a:lastline
-
-	let str_orig = getline(cur)
-	let save_et = &et
-	set et
-	exec cur . "retab"
-	let &et = save_et
-	let str = getline(cur)
-
-	let indent_str = indent_fix
-	let indent_n = strlen(indent_str)
-	" Shall we remember the current indentation
-	if indent < 0
-	    let indent_orig = matchstr(str_orig, '^\s*')
-	    if strlen(indent_orig) > 0
-		let indent_str = indent_orig
-		let indent_n = strlen(matchstr(str, '^\s*'))
-	    endif
-	endif
-
-	" Trim trailing, leading and running whitespace
-	let str = substitute(str, '\s\+$', '', '')
-	let str = substitute(str, '^\s\+', '', '')
-	let str = substitute(str, '\s\+', ' ', 'g')
-	let str_n = strdisplaywidth(str)
-
-	" Possible addition of space after punctuation
-	if exists("join_str")
-	    let str = substitute(str, join_str, '\1 ', 'g')
-	endif
-	let join_n = strdisplaywidth(str) - str_n
-
-	" Can extraspaces be added?
-	" Note that str_n may be less than strlen(str) [joinspaces above]
-	if strdisplaywidth(str) <= tw - indent_n && str_n > 0
-	    " How many spaces should be added
-	    let s_add = tw - str_n - indent_n - join_n
-	    let s_nr  = strlen(substitute(str, '\S', '', 'g') ) - join_n
-	    let s_dup = s_add / s_nr
-	    let s_mod = s_add % s_nr
-
-	    " Test if the changed line fits with tw
-	    if 0 <= (str_n + (maxspaces - 1)*s_nr + indent_n) - tw
-
-		" Duplicate spaces
-		while s_dup > 0
-		    let str = substitute(str, '\( \+\)', ' \1', 'g')
-		    let s_dup = s_dup - 1
-		endwhile
-
-		" Add extra spaces from the end
-		while s_mod > 0
-		    let str = substitute(str, '\(\(\s\+\S\+\)\{' . s_mod .  '}\)$', ' \1', '')
-		    let s_mod = s_mod - 1
-		endwhile
-
-		" Indent the line
-		if indent_n > 0
-		    let str = substitute(str, '^', indent_str, '' )
-		endif
-
-		" Replace the line
-		call setline(cur, str)
-
-		" Convert to whitespace
-		if &et == 0
-		    exec cur . 'retab!'
-		endif
-
-	    endif   " Change of line
-	endif	" Possible change
-
-	let cur = cur + 1
-    endwhile
-
-    norm ^
-
-    let &report = save_report
-
-endfunction
-
-" EOF	vim: tw=78 ts=8 sw=4 sts=4 noet ai
+" Load the justify package.
+" For those users who were loading the justify plugin from here.
+packadd justify

runtime/macros/matchit.vim

@@ -1,813 +1,3 @@
-"  matchit.vim: (global plugin) Extended "%" matching
-"  Last Change: Fri Jan 25 10:00 AM 2008 EST
-"  Maintainer:  Benji Fisher PhD   <benji@member.AMS.org>
-"  Version:     1.13.2, for Vim 6.3+
-"  URL:		http://www.vim.org/script.php?script_id=39
-
-" Documentation:
-"  The documentation is in a separate file, matchit.txt .
-
-" Credits:
-"  Vim editor by Bram Moolenaar (Thanks, Bram!)
-"  Original script and design by Raul Segura Acevedo
-"  Support for comments by Douglas Potts
-"  Support for back references and other improvements by Benji Fisher
-"  Support for many languages by Johannes Zellner
-"  Suggestions for improvement, bug reports, and support for additional
-"  languages by Jordi-Albert Batalla, Neil Bird, Servatius Brandt, Mark
-"  Collett, Stephen Wall, Dany St-Amant, Yuheng Xie, and Johannes Zellner.
-
-" Debugging:
-"  If you'd like to try the built-in debugging commands...
-"   :MatchDebug      to activate debugging for the current buffer
-"  This saves the values of several key script variables as buffer-local
-"  variables.  See the MatchDebug() function, below, for details.
-
-" TODO:  I should think about multi-line patterns for b:match_words.
-"   This would require an option:  how many lines to scan (default 1).
-"   This would be useful for Python, maybe also for *ML.
-" TODO:  Maybe I should add a menu so that people will actually use some of
-"   the features that I have implemented.
-" TODO:  Eliminate the MultiMatch function.  Add yet another argument to
-"   Match_wrapper() instead.
-" TODO:  Allow :let b:match_words = '\(\(foo\)\(bar\)\):\3\2:end\1'
-" TODO:  Make backrefs safer by using '\V' (very no-magic).
-" TODO:  Add a level of indirection, so that custom % scripts can use my
-"   work but extend it.
-
-" allow user to prevent loading
-" and prevent duplicate loading
-if exists("loaded_matchit") || &cp
-  finish
-endif
-let loaded_matchit = 1
-let s:last_mps = ""
-let s:last_words = ":"
-
-let s:save_cpo = &cpo
-set cpo&vim
-
-nnoremap <silent> %  :<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',1,'n') <CR>
-nnoremap <silent> g% :<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',0,'n') <CR>
-vnoremap <silent> %  :<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',1,'v') <CR>m'gv``
-vnoremap <silent> g% :<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',0,'v') <CR>m'gv``
-onoremap <silent> %  v:<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',1,'o') <CR>
-onoremap <silent> g% v:<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',0,'o') <CR>
-
-" Analogues of [{ and ]} using matching patterns:
-nnoremap <silent> [% :<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("bW", "n") <CR>
-nnoremap <silent> ]% :<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("W",  "n") <CR>
-vmap [% <Esc>[%m'gv``
-vmap ]% <Esc>]%m'gv``
-" vnoremap <silent> [% :<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("bW", "v") <CR>m'gv``
-" vnoremap <silent> ]% :<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("W",  "v") <CR>m'gv``
-onoremap <silent> [% v:<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("bW", "o") <CR>
-onoremap <silent> ]% v:<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("W",  "o") <CR>
-
-" text object:
-vmap a% <Esc>[%v]%
-
-" Auto-complete mappings:  (not yet "ready for prime time")
-" TODO Read :help write-plugin for the "right" way to let the user
-" specify a key binding.
-"   let g:match_auto = '<C-]>'
-"   let g:match_autoCR = '<C-CR>'
-" if exists("g:match_auto")
-"   execute "inoremap " . g:match_auto . ' x<Esc>"=<SID>Autocomplete()<CR>Pls'
-" endif
-" if exists("g:match_autoCR")
-"   execute "inoremap " . g:match_autoCR . ' <CR><C-R>=<SID>Autocomplete()<CR>'
-" endif
-" if exists("g:match_gthhoh")
-"   execute "inoremap " . g:match_gthhoh . ' <C-O>:call <SID>Gthhoh()<CR>'
-" endif " gthhoh = "Get the heck out of here!"
-
-let s:notslash = '\\\@<!\%(\\\\\)*'
-
-function! s:Match_wrapper(word, forward, mode) range
-  " In s:CleanUp(), :execute "set" restore_options .
-  let restore_options = (&ic ? " " : " no") . "ignorecase"
-  if exists("b:match_ignorecase")
-    let &ignorecase = b:match_ignorecase
-  endif
-  let restore_options = " ve=" . &ve . restore_options
-  set ve=
-  " If this function was called from Visual mode, make sure that the cursor
-  " is at the correct end of the Visual range:
-  if a:mode == "v"
-    execute "normal! gv\<Esc>"
-  endif
-  " In s:CleanUp(), we may need to check whether the cursor moved forward.
-  let startline = line(".")
-  let startcol = col(".")
-  " Use default behavior if called with a count.
-  if v:count
-    exe "normal! " . v:count . "%"
-    return s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol)
-  end
-
-  " First step:  if not already done, set the script variables
-  "   s:do_BR	flag for whether there are backrefs
-  "   s:pat	parsed version of b:match_words
-  "   s:all	regexp based on s:pat and the default groups
-  "
-  if !exists("b:match_words") || b:match_words == ""
-    let match_words = ""
-    " Allow b:match_words = "GetVimMatchWords()" .
-  elseif b:match_words =~ ":"
-    let match_words = b:match_words
-  else
-    execute "let match_words =" b:match_words
-  endif
-" Thanks to Preben "Peppe" Guldberg and Bram Moolenaar for this suggestion!
-  if (match_words != s:last_words) || (&mps != s:last_mps) ||
-    \ exists("b:match_debug")
-    let s:last_words = match_words
-    let s:last_mps = &mps
-    " The next several lines were here before
-    " BF started messing with this script.
-    " quote the special chars in 'matchpairs', replace [,:] with \| and then
-    " append the builtin pairs (/*, */, #if, #ifdef, #else, #elif, #endif)
-    " let default = substitute(escape(&mps, '[$^.*~\\/?]'), '[,:]\+',
-    "  \ '\\|', 'g').'\|\/\*\|\*\/\|#if\>\|#ifdef\>\|#else\>\|#elif\>\|#endif\>'
-    let default = escape(&mps, '[$^.*~\\/?]') . (strlen(&mps) ? "," : "") .
-      \ '\/\*:\*\/,#\s*if\%(def\)\=:#\s*else\>:#\s*elif\>:#\s*endif\>'
-    " s:all = pattern with all the keywords
-    let match_words = match_words . (strlen(match_words) ? "," : "") . default
-    if match_words !~ s:notslash . '\\\d'
-      let s:do_BR = 0
-      let s:pat = match_words
-    else
-      let s:do_BR = 1
-      let s:pat = s:ParseWords(match_words)
-    endif
-    let s:all = substitute(s:pat, s:notslash . '\zs[,:]\+', '\\|', 'g')
-    let s:all = '\%(' . s:all . '\)'
-    " let s:all = '\%(' . substitute(s:all, '\\\ze[,:]', '', 'g') . '\)'
-    if exists("b:match_debug")
-      let b:match_pat = s:pat
-    endif
-  endif
-
-  " Second step:  set the following local variables:
-  "     matchline = line on which the cursor started
-  "     curcol    = number of characters before match
-  "     prefix    = regexp for start of line to start of match
-  "     suffix    = regexp for end of match to end of line
-  " Require match to end on or after the cursor and prefer it to
-  " start on or before the cursor.
-  let matchline = getline(startline)
-  if a:word != ''
-    " word given
-    if a:word !~ s:all
-      echohl WarningMsg|echo 'Missing rule for word:"'.a:word.'"'|echohl NONE
-      return s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol)
-    endif
-    let matchline = a:word
-    let curcol = 0
-    let prefix = '^\%('
-    let suffix = '\)$'
-  " Now the case when "word" is not given
-  else	" Find the match that ends on or after the cursor and set curcol.
-    let regexp = s:Wholematch(matchline, s:all, startcol-1)
-    let curcol = match(matchline, regexp)
-    " If there is no match, give up.
-    if curcol == -1
-      return s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol)
-    endif
-    let endcol = matchend(matchline, regexp)
-    let suf = strlen(matchline) - endcol
-    let prefix = (curcol ? '^.*\%'  . (curcol + 1) . 'c\%(' : '^\%(')
-    let suffix = (suf ? '\)\%' . (endcol + 1) . 'c.*$'  : '\)$')
-  endif
-  if exists("b:match_debug")
-    let b:match_match = matchstr(matchline, regexp)
-    let b:match_col = curcol+1
-  endif
-
-  " Third step:  Find the group and single word that match, and the original
-  " (backref) versions of these.  Then, resolve the backrefs.
-  " Set the following local variable:
-  " group = colon-separated list of patterns, one of which matches
-  "       = ini:mid:fin or ini:fin
-  "
-  " Reconstruct the version with unresolved backrefs.
-  let patBR = substitute(match_words.',',
-    \ s:notslash.'\zs[,:]*,[,:]*', ',', 'g')
-  let patBR = substitute(patBR, s:notslash.'\zs:\{2,}', ':', 'g')
-  " Now, set group and groupBR to the matching group: 'if:endif' or
-  " 'while:endwhile' or whatever.  A bit of a kluge:  s:Choose() returns
-  " group . "," . groupBR, and we pick it apart.
-  let group = s:Choose(s:pat, matchline, ",", ":", prefix, suffix, patBR)
-  let i = matchend(group, s:notslash . ",")
-  let groupBR = strpart(group, i)
-  let group = strpart(group, 0, i-1)
-  " Now, matchline =~ prefix . substitute(group,':','\|','g') . suffix
-  if s:do_BR " Do the hard part:  resolve those backrefs!
-    let group = s:InsertRefs(groupBR, prefix, group, suffix, matchline)
-  endif
-  if exists("b:match_debug")
-    let b:match_wholeBR = groupBR
-    let i = matchend(groupBR, s:notslash . ":")
-    let b:match_iniBR = strpart(groupBR, 0, i-1)
-  endif
-
-  " Fourth step:  Set the arguments for searchpair().
-  let i = matchend(group, s:notslash . ":")
-  let j = matchend(group, '.*' . s:notslash . ":")
-  let ini = strpart(group, 0, i-1)
-  let mid = substitute(strpart(group, i,j-i-1), s:notslash.'\zs:', '\\|', 'g')
-  let fin = strpart(group, j)
-  "Un-escape the remaining , and : characters.
-  let ini = substitute(ini, s:notslash . '\zs\\\(:\|,\)', '\1', 'g')
-  let mid = substitute(mid, s:notslash . '\zs\\\(:\|,\)', '\1', 'g')
-  let fin = substitute(fin, s:notslash . '\zs\\\(:\|,\)', '\1', 'g')
-  " searchpair() requires that these patterns avoid \(\) groups.
-  let ini = substitute(ini, s:notslash . '\zs\\(', '\\%(', 'g')
-  let mid = substitute(mid, s:notslash . '\zs\\(', '\\%(', 'g')
-  let fin = substitute(fin, s:notslash . '\zs\\(', '\\%(', 'g')
-  " Set mid.  This is optimized for readability, not micro-efficiency!
-  if a:forward && matchline =~ prefix . fin . suffix
-    \ || !a:forward && matchline =~ prefix . ini . suffix
-    let mid = ""
-  endif
-  " Set flag.  This is optimized for readability, not micro-efficiency!
-  if a:forward && matchline =~ prefix . fin . suffix
-    \ || !a:forward && matchline !~ prefix . ini . suffix
-    let flag = "bW"
-  else
-    let flag = "W"
-  endif
-  " Set skip.
-  if exists("b:match_skip")
-    let skip = b:match_skip
-  elseif exists("b:match_comment") " backwards compatibility and testing!
-    let skip = "r:" . b:match_comment
-  else
-    let skip = 's:comment\|string'
-  endif
-  let skip = s:ParseSkip(skip)
-  if exists("b:match_debug")
-    let b:match_ini = ini
-    let b:match_tail = (strlen(mid) ? mid.'\|' : '') . fin
-  endif
-
-  " Fifth step:  actually start moving the cursor and call searchpair().
-  " Later, :execute restore_cursor to get to the original screen.
-  let restore_cursor = virtcol(".") . "|"
-  normal! g0
-  let restore_cursor = line(".") . "G" .  virtcol(".") . "|zs" . restore_cursor
-  normal! H
-  let restore_cursor = "normal!" . line(".") . "Gzt" . restore_cursor
-  execute restore_cursor
-  call cursor(0, curcol + 1)
-  " normal! 0
-  " if curcol
-  "   execute "normal!" . curcol . "l"
-  " endif
-  if skip =~ 'synID' && !(has("syntax") && exists("g:syntax_on"))
-    let skip = "0"
-  else
-    execute "if " . skip . "| let skip = '0' | endif"
-  endif
-  let sp_return = searchpair(ini, mid, fin, flag, skip)
-  let final_position = "call cursor(" . line(".") . "," . col(".") . ")"
-  " Restore cursor position and original screen.
-  execute restore_cursor
-  normal! m'
-  if sp_return > 0
-    execute final_position
-  endif
-  return s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol, mid.'\|'.fin)
-endfun
-
-" Restore options and do some special handling for Operator-pending mode.
-" The optional argument is the tail of the matching group.
-fun! s:CleanUp(options, mode, startline, startcol, ...)
-  execute "set" a:options
-  " Open folds, if appropriate.
-  if a:mode != "o"
-    if &foldopen =~ "percent"
-      normal! zv
-    endif
-    " In Operator-pending mode, we want to include the whole match
-    " (for example, d%).
-    " This is only a problem if we end up moving in the forward direction.
-  elseif (a:startline < line(".")) ||
-	\ (a:startline == line(".") && a:startcol < col("."))
-    if a:0
-      " Check whether the match is a single character.  If not, move to the
-      " end of the match.
-      let matchline = getline(".")
-      let currcol = col(".")
-      let regexp = s:Wholematch(matchline, a:1, currcol-1)
-      let endcol = matchend(matchline, regexp)
-      if endcol > currcol  " This is NOT off by one!
-	call cursor(0, endcol)
-      endif
-    endif " a:0
-  endif " a:mode != "o" && etc.
-  return 0
-endfun
-
-" Example (simplified HTML patterns):  if
-"   a:groupBR	= '<\(\k\+\)>:</\1>'
-"   a:prefix	= '^.\{3}\('
-"   a:group	= '<\(\k\+\)>:</\(\k\+\)>'
-"   a:suffix	= '\).\{2}$'
-"   a:matchline	=  "123<tag>12" or "123</tag>12"
-" then extract "tag" from a:matchline and return "<tag>:</tag>" .
-fun! s:InsertRefs(groupBR, prefix, group, suffix, matchline)
-  if a:matchline !~ a:prefix .
-    \ substitute(a:group, s:notslash . '\zs:', '\\|', 'g') . a:suffix
-    return a:group
-  endif
-  let i = matchend(a:groupBR, s:notslash . ':')
-  let ini = strpart(a:groupBR, 0, i-1)
-  let tailBR = strpart(a:groupBR, i)
-  let word = s:Choose(a:group, a:matchline, ":", "", a:prefix, a:suffix,
-    \ a:groupBR)
-  let i = matchend(word, s:notslash . ":")
-  let wordBR = strpart(word, i)
-  let word = strpart(word, 0, i-1)
-  " Now, a:matchline =~ a:prefix . word . a:suffix
-  if wordBR != ini
-    let table = s:Resolve(ini, wordBR, "table")
-  else
-    " let table = "----------"
-    let table = ""
-    let d = 0
-    while d < 10
-      if tailBR =~ s:notslash . '\\' . d
-	" let table[d] = d
-	let table = table . d
-      else
-	let table = table . "-"
-      endif
-      let d = d + 1
-    endwhile
-  endif
-  let d = 9
-  while d
-    if table[d] != "-"
-      let backref = substitute(a:matchline, a:prefix.word.a:suffix,
-	\ '\'.table[d], "")
-	" Are there any other characters that should be escaped?
-      let backref = escape(backref, '*,:')
-      execute s:Ref(ini, d, "start", "len")
-      let ini = strpart(ini, 0, start) . backref . strpart(ini, start+len)
-      let tailBR = substitute(tailBR, s:notslash . '\zs\\' . d,
-	\ escape(backref, '\\&'), 'g')
-    endif
-    let d = d-1
-  endwhile
-  if exists("b:match_debug")
-    if s:do_BR
-      let b:match_table = table
-      let b:match_word = word
-    else
-      let b:match_table = ""
-      let b:match_word = ""
-    endif
-  endif
-  return ini . ":" . tailBR
-endfun
-
-" Input a comma-separated list of groups with backrefs, such as
-"   a:groups = '\(foo\):end\1,\(bar\):end\1'
-" and return a comma-separated list of groups with backrefs replaced:
-"   return '\(foo\):end\(foo\),\(bar\):end\(bar\)'
-fun! s:ParseWords(groups)
-  let groups = substitute(a:groups.",", s:notslash.'\zs[,:]*,[,:]*', ',', 'g')
-  let groups = substitute(groups, s:notslash . '\zs:\{2,}', ':', 'g')
-  let parsed = ""
-  while groups =~ '[^,:]'
-    let i = matchend(groups, s:notslash . ':')
-    let j = matchend(groups, s:notslash . ',')
-    let ini = strpart(groups, 0, i-1)
-    let tail = strpart(groups, i, j-i-1) . ":"
-    let groups = strpart(groups, j)
-    let parsed = parsed . ini
-    let i = matchend(tail, s:notslash . ':')
-    while i != -1
-      " In 'if:else:endif', ini='if' and word='else' and then word='endif'.
-      let word = strpart(tail, 0, i-1)
-      let tail = strpart(tail, i)
-      let i = matchend(tail, s:notslash . ':')
-      let parsed = parsed . ":" . s:Resolve(ini, word, "word")
-    endwhile " Now, tail has been used up.
-    let parsed = parsed . ","
-  endwhile " groups =~ '[^,:]'
-  let parsed = substitute(parsed, ',$', '', '')
-  return parsed
-endfun
-
-" TODO I think this can be simplified and/or made more efficient.
-" TODO What should I do if a:start is out of range?
-" Return a regexp that matches all of a:string, such that
-" matchstr(a:string, regexp) represents the match for a:pat that starts
-" as close to a:start as possible, before being preferred to after, and
-" ends after a:start .
-" Usage:
-" let regexp = s:Wholematch(getline("."), 'foo\|bar', col(".")-1)
-" let i      = match(getline("."), regexp)
-" let j      = matchend(getline("."), regexp)
-" let match  = matchstr(getline("."), regexp)
-fun! s:Wholematch(string, pat, start)
-  let group = '\%(' . a:pat . '\)'
-  let prefix = (a:start ? '\(^.*\%<' . (a:start + 2) . 'c\)\zs' : '^')
-  let len = strlen(a:string)
-  let suffix = (a:start+1 < len ? '\(\%>'.(a:start+1).'c.*$\)\@=' : '$')
-  if a:string !~ prefix . group . suffix
-    let prefix = ''
-  endif
-  return prefix . group . suffix
-endfun
-
-" No extra arguments:  s:Ref(string, d) will
-" find the d'th occurrence of '\(' and return it, along with everything up
-" to and including the matching '\)'.
-" One argument:  s:Ref(string, d, "start") returns the index of the start
-" of the d'th '\(' and any other argument returns the length of the group.
-" Two arguments:  s:Ref(string, d, "foo", "bar") returns a string to be
-" executed, having the effect of
-"   :let foo = s:Ref(string, d, "start")
-"   :let bar = s:Ref(string, d, "len")
-fun! s:Ref(string, d, ...)
-  let len = strlen(a:string)
-  if a:d == 0
-    let start = 0
-  else
-    let cnt = a:d
-    let match = a:string
-    while cnt
-      let cnt = cnt - 1
-      let index = matchend(match, s:notslash . '\\(')
-      if index == -1
-	return ""
-      endif
-      let match = strpart(match, index)
-    endwhile
-    let start = len - strlen(match)
-    if a:0 == 1 && a:1 == "start"
-      return start - 2
-    endif
-    let cnt = 1
-    while cnt
-      let index = matchend(match, s:notslash . '\\(\|\\)') - 1
-      if index == -2
-	return ""
-      endif
-      " Increment if an open, decrement if a ')':
-      let cnt = cnt + (match[index]=="(" ? 1 : -1)  " ')'
-      " let cnt = stridx('0(', match[index]) + cnt
-      let match = strpart(match, index+1)
-    endwhile
-    let start = start - 2
-    let len = len - start - strlen(match)
-  endif
-  if a:0 == 1
-    return len
-  elseif a:0 == 2
-    return "let " . a:1 . "=" . start . "| let " . a:2 . "=" . len
-  else
-    return strpart(a:string, start, len)
-  endif
-endfun
-
-" Count the number of disjoint copies of pattern in string.
-" If the pattern is a literal string and contains no '0' or '1' characters
-" then s:Count(string, pattern, '0', '1') should be faster than
-" s:Count(string, pattern).
-fun! s:Count(string, pattern, ...)
-  let pat = escape(a:pattern, '\\')
-  if a:0 > 1
-    let foo = substitute(a:string, '[^'.a:pattern.']', "a:1", "g")
-    let foo = substitute(a:string, pat, a:2, "g")
-    let foo = substitute(foo, '[^' . a:2 . ']', "", "g")
-    return strlen(foo)
-  endif
-  let result = 0
-  let foo = a:string
-  let index = matchend(foo, pat)
-  while index != -1
-    let result = result + 1
-    let foo = strpart(foo, index)
-    let index = matchend(foo, pat)
-  endwhile
-  return result
-endfun
-
-" s:Resolve('\(a\)\(b\)', '\(c\)\2\1\1\2') should return table.word, where
-" word = '\(c\)\(b\)\(a\)\3\2' and table = '-32-------'.  That is, the first
-" '\1' in target is replaced by '\(a\)' in word, table[1] = 3, and this
-" indicates that all other instances of '\1' in target are to be replaced
-" by '\3'.  The hard part is dealing with nesting...
-" Note that ":" is an illegal character for source and target,
-" unless it is preceded by "\".
-fun! s:Resolve(source, target, output)
-  let word = a:target
-  let i = matchend(word, s:notslash . '\\\d') - 1
-  let table = "----------"
-  while i != -2 " There are back references to be replaced.
-    let d = word[i]
-    let backref = s:Ref(a:source, d)
-    " The idea is to replace '\d' with backref.  Before we do this,
-    " replace any \(\) groups in backref with :1, :2, ... if they
-    " correspond to the first, second, ... group already inserted
-    " into backref.  Later, replace :1 with \1 and so on.  The group
-    " number w+b within backref corresponds to the group number
-    " s within a:source.
-    " w = number of '\(' in word before the current one
-    let w = s:Count(
-    \ substitute(strpart(word, 0, i-1), '\\\\', '', 'g'), '\(', '1')
-    let b = 1 " number of the current '\(' in backref
-    let s = d " number of the current '\(' in a:source
-    while b <= s:Count(substitute(backref, '\\\\', '', 'g'), '\(', '1')
-    \ && s < 10
-      if table[s] == "-"
-	if w + b < 10
-	  " let table[s] = w + b
-	  let table = strpart(table, 0, s) . (w+b) . strpart(table, s+1)
-	endif
-	let b = b + 1
-	let s = s + 1
-      else
-	execute s:Ref(backref, b, "start", "len")
-	let ref = strpart(backref, start, len)
-	let backref = strpart(backref, 0, start) . ":". table[s]
-	\ . strpart(backref, start+len)
-	let s = s + s:Count(substitute(ref, '\\\\', '', 'g'), '\(', '1')
-      endif
-    endwhile
-    let word = strpart(word, 0, i-1) . backref . strpart(word, i+1)
-    let i = matchend(word, s:notslash . '\\\d') - 1
-  endwhile
-  let word = substitute(word, s:notslash . '\zs:', '\\', 'g')
-  if a:output == "table"
-    return table
-  elseif a:output == "word"
-    return word
-  else
-    return table . word
-  endif
-endfun
-
-" Assume a:comma = ",".  Then the format for a:patterns and a:1 is
-"   a:patterns = "<pat1>,<pat2>,..."
-"   a:1 = "<alt1>,<alt2>,..."
-" If <patn> is the first pattern that matches a:string then return <patn>
-" if no optional arguments are given; return <patn>,<altn> if a:1 is given.
-fun! s:Choose(patterns, string, comma, branch, prefix, suffix, ...)
-  let tail = (a:patterns =~ a:comma."$" ? a:patterns : a:patterns . a:comma)
-  let i = matchend(tail, s:notslash . a:comma)
-  if a:0
-    let alttail = (a:1 =~ a:comma."$" ? a:1 : a:1 . a:comma)
-    let j = matchend(alttail, s:notslash . a:comma)
-  endif
-  let current = strpart(tail, 0, i-1)
-  if a:branch == ""
-    let currpat = current
-  else
-    let currpat = substitute(current, s:notslash . a:branch, '\\|', 'g')
-  endif
-  while a:string !~ a:prefix . currpat . a:suffix
-    let tail = strpart(tail, i)
-    let i = matchend(tail, s:notslash . a:comma)
-    if i == -1
-      return -1
-    endif
-    let current = strpart(tail, 0, i-1)
-    if a:branch == ""
-      let currpat = current
-    else
-      let currpat = substitute(current, s:notslash . a:branch, '\\|', 'g')
-    endif
-    if a:0
-      let alttail = strpart(alttail, j)
-      let j = matchend(alttail, s:notslash . a:comma)
-    endif
-  endwhile
-  if a:0
-    let current = current . a:comma . strpart(alttail, 0, j-1)
-  endif
-  return current
-endfun
-
-" Call this function to turn on debugging information.  Every time the main
-" script is run, buffer variables will be saved.  These can be used directly
-" or viewed using the menu items below.
-if !exists(":MatchDebug")
-  command! -nargs=0 MatchDebug call s:Match_debug()
-endif
-
-fun! s:Match_debug()
-  let b:match_debug = 1	" Save debugging information.
-  " pat = all of b:match_words with backrefs parsed
-  amenu &Matchit.&pat	:echo b:match_pat<CR>
-  " match = bit of text that is recognized as a match
-  amenu &Matchit.&match	:echo b:match_match<CR>
-  " curcol = cursor column of the start of the matching text
-  amenu &Matchit.&curcol	:echo b:match_col<CR>
-  " wholeBR = matching group, original version
-  amenu &Matchit.wh&oleBR	:echo b:match_wholeBR<CR>
-  " iniBR = 'if' piece, original version
-  amenu &Matchit.ini&BR	:echo b:match_iniBR<CR>
-  " ini = 'if' piece, with all backrefs resolved from match
-  amenu &Matchit.&ini	:echo b:match_ini<CR>
-  " tail = 'else\|endif' piece, with all backrefs resolved from match
-  amenu &Matchit.&tail	:echo b:match_tail<CR>
-  " fin = 'endif' piece, with all backrefs resolved from match
-  amenu &Matchit.&word	:echo b:match_word<CR>
-  " '\'.d in ini refers to the same thing as '\'.table[d] in word.
-  amenu &Matchit.t&able	:echo '0:' . b:match_table . ':9'<CR>
-endfun
-
-" Jump to the nearest unmatched "(" or "if" or "<tag>" if a:spflag == "bW"
-" or the nearest unmatched "</tag>" or "endif" or ")" if a:spflag == "W".
-" Return a "mark" for the original position, so that
-"   let m = MultiMatch("bW", "n") ... execute m
-" will return to the original position.  If there is a problem, do not
-" move the cursor and return "", unless a count is given, in which case
-" go up or down as many levels as possible and again return "".
-" TODO This relies on the same patterns as % matching.  It might be a good
-" idea to give it its own matching patterns.
-fun! s:MultiMatch(spflag, mode)
-  if !exists("b:match_words") || b:match_words == ""
-    return ""
-  end
-  let restore_options = (&ic ? "" : "no") . "ignorecase"
-  if exists("b:match_ignorecase")
-    let &ignorecase = b:match_ignorecase
-  endif
-  let startline = line(".")
-  let startcol = col(".")
-
-  " First step:  if not already done, set the script variables
-  "   s:do_BR	flag for whether there are backrefs
-  "   s:pat	parsed version of b:match_words
-  "   s:all	regexp based on s:pat and the default groups
-  " This part is copied and slightly modified from s:Match_wrapper().
-  let default = escape(&mps, '[$^.*~\\/?]') . (strlen(&mps) ? "," : "") .
-    \ '\/\*:\*\/,#\s*if\%(def\)\=:#\s*else\>:#\s*elif\>:#\s*endif\>'
-  " Allow b:match_words = "GetVimMatchWords()" .
-  if b:match_words =~ ":"
-    let match_words = b:match_words
-  else
-    execute "let match_words =" b:match_words
-  endif
-  if (match_words != s:last_words) || (&mps != s:last_mps) ||
-    \ exists("b:match_debug")
-    let s:last_words = match_words
-    let s:last_mps = &mps
-    if match_words !~ s:notslash . '\\\d'
-      let s:do_BR = 0
-      let s:pat = match_words
-    else
-      let s:do_BR = 1
-      let s:pat = s:ParseWords(match_words)
-    endif
-    let s:all = '\%(' . substitute(s:pat . (strlen(s:pat)?",":"") . default,
-      \	'[,:]\+','\\|','g') . '\)'
-    if exists("b:match_debug")
-      let b:match_pat = s:pat
-    endif
-  endif
-
-  " Second step:  figure out the patterns for searchpair()
-  " and save the screen, cursor position, and 'ignorecase'.
-  " - TODO:  A lot of this is copied from s:Match_wrapper().
-  " - maybe even more functionality should be split off
-  " - into separate functions!
-  let cdefault = (s:pat =~ '[^,]$' ? "," : "") . default
-  let open =  substitute(s:pat . cdefault,
-	\ s:notslash . '\zs:.\{-}' . s:notslash . ',', '\\),\\(', 'g')
-  let open =  '\(' . substitute(open, s:notslash . '\zs:.*$', '\\)', '')
-  let close = substitute(s:pat . cdefault,
-	\ s:notslash . '\zs,.\{-}' . s:notslash . ':', '\\),\\(', 'g')
-  let close = substitute(close, '^.\{-}' . s:notslash . ':', '\\(', '') . '\)'
-  if exists("b:match_skip")
-    let skip = b:match_skip
-  elseif exists("b:match_comment") " backwards compatibility and testing!
-    let skip = "r:" . b:match_comment
-  else
-    let skip = 's:comment\|string'
-  endif
-  let skip = s:ParseSkip(skip)
-  " let restore_cursor = line(".") . "G" . virtcol(".") . "|"
-  " normal! H
-  " let restore_cursor = "normal!" . line(".") . "Gzt" . restore_cursor
-  let restore_cursor = virtcol(".") . "|"
-  normal! g0
-  let restore_cursor = line(".") . "G" .  virtcol(".") . "|zs" . restore_cursor
-  normal! H
-  let restore_cursor = "normal!" . line(".") . "Gzt" . restore_cursor
-  execute restore_cursor
-
-  " Third step: call searchpair().
-  " Replace '\('--but not '\\('--with '\%(' and ',' with '\|'.
-  let openpat =  substitute(open, '\(\\\@<!\(\\\\\)*\)\@<=\\(', '\\%(', 'g')
-  let openpat = substitute(openpat, ',', '\\|', 'g')
-  let closepat = substitute(close, '\(\\\@<!\(\\\\\)*\)\@<=\\(', '\\%(', 'g')
-  let closepat = substitute(closepat, ',', '\\|', 'g')
-  if skip =~ 'synID' && !(has("syntax") && exists("g:syntax_on"))
-    let skip = '0'
-  else
-    execute "if " . skip . "| let skip = '0' | endif"
-  endif
-  mark '
-  let level = v:count1
-  while level
-    if searchpair(openpat, '', closepat, a:spflag, skip) < 1
-      call s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol)
-      return ""
-    endif
-    let level = level - 1
-  endwhile
-
-  " Restore options and return a string to restore the original position.
-  call s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol)
-  return restore_cursor
-endfun
-
-" Search backwards for "if" or "while" or "<tag>" or ...
-" and return "endif" or "endwhile" or "</tag>" or ... .
-" For now, this uses b:match_words and the same script variables
-" as s:Match_wrapper() .  Later, it may get its own patterns,
-" either from a buffer variable or passed as arguments.
-" fun! s:Autocomplete()
-"   echo "autocomplete not yet implemented :-("
-"   if !exists("b:match_words") || b:match_words == ""
-"     return ""
-"   end
-"   let startpos = s:MultiMatch("bW")
-"
-"   if startpos == ""
-"     return ""
-"   endif
-"   " - TODO:  figure out whether 'if' or '<tag>' matched, and construct
-"   " - the appropriate closing.
-"   let matchline = getline(".")
-"   let curcol = col(".") - 1
-"   " - TODO:  Change the s:all argument if there is a new set of match pats.
-"   let regexp = s:Wholematch(matchline, s:all, curcol)
-"   let suf = strlen(matchline) - matchend(matchline, regexp)
-"   let prefix = (curcol ? '^.\{'  . curcol . '}\%(' : '^\%(')
-"   let suffix = (suf ? '\).\{' . suf . '}$'  : '\)$')
-"   " Reconstruct the version with unresolved backrefs.
-"   let patBR = substitute(b:match_words.',', '[,:]*,[,:]*', ',', 'g')
-"   let patBR = substitute(patBR, ':\{2,}', ':', "g")
-"   " Now, set group and groupBR to the matching group: 'if:endif' or
-"   " 'while:endwhile' or whatever.
-"   let group = s:Choose(s:pat, matchline, ",", ":", prefix, suffix, patBR)
-"   let i = matchend(group, s:notslash . ",")
-"   let groupBR = strpart(group, i)
-"   let group = strpart(group, 0, i-1)
-"   " Now, matchline =~ prefix . substitute(group,':','\|','g') . suffix
-"   if s:do_BR
-"     let group = s:InsertRefs(groupBR, prefix, group, suffix, matchline)
-"   endif
-" " let g:group = group
-"
-"   " - TODO:  Construct the closing from group.
-"   let fake = "end" . expand("<cword>")
-"   execute startpos
-"   return fake
-" endfun
-
-" Close all open structures.  "Get the heck out of here!"
-" fun! s:Gthhoh()
-"   let close = s:Autocomplete()
-"   while strlen(close)
-"     put=close
-"     let close = s:Autocomplete()
-"   endwhile
-" endfun
-
-" Parse special strings as typical skip arguments for searchpair():
-"   s:foo becomes (current syntax item) =~ foo
-"   S:foo becomes (current syntax item) !~ foo
-"   r:foo becomes (line before cursor) =~ foo
-"   R:foo becomes (line before cursor) !~ foo
-fun! s:ParseSkip(str)
-  let skip = a:str
-  if skip[1] == ":"
-    if skip[0] == "s"
-      let skip = "synIDattr(synID(line('.'),col('.'),1),'name') =~? '" .
-	\ strpart(skip,2) . "'"
-    elseif skip[0] == "S"
-      let skip = "synIDattr(synID(line('.'),col('.'),1),'name') !~? '" .
-	\ strpart(skip,2) . "'"
-    elseif skip[0] == "r"
-      let skip = "strpart(getline('.'),0,col('.'))=~'" . strpart(skip,2). "'"
-    elseif skip[0] == "R"
-      let skip = "strpart(getline('.'),0,col('.'))!~'" . strpart(skip,2). "'"
-    endif
-  endif
-  return skip
-endfun
-
-let &cpo = s:save_cpo
-unlet s:save_cpo
-
-" vim:sts=2:sw=2:
+" Load the matchit package.
+" For those users who were loading the matchit plugin from here.
+packadd matchit

runtime/macros/shellmenu.vim

@@ -1,94 +1,3 @@
-" When you're writing shell scripts and you are in doubt which test to use,
-" which shell environment variables are defined, what the syntax of the case
-" statement is, and you need to invoke 'man sh'?
-"
-" Your problems are over now!
-"
-" Attached is a Vim script file for turning gvim into a shell script editor.
-" It may also be used as an example how to use menus in Vim.
-"
-" Written by: Lennart Schultz <les@dmi.min.dk>
-
-imenu Stmts.for	for  in 
-do
-
-doneki	kk0elli
-imenu Stmts.case	case  in
-) ;;
-esacbki	k0elli
-imenu Stmts.if	if   
-then
-
-fiki	kk0elli
-imenu Stmts.if-else	if   
-then
-
-else
-
-fiki	kki	kk0elli
-imenu Stmts.elif	elif   
-then
-
-ki	kk0elli
-imenu Stmts.while	while   
-do
-
-doneki	kk0elli
-imenu Stmts.break	break 
-imenu Stmts.continue	continue 
-imenu Stmts.function	() {
-
-}ki	k0i
-imenu Stmts.return	return 
-imenu Stmts.return-true	return 0
-imenu Stmts.return-false	return 1
-imenu Stmts.exit	exit 
-imenu Stmts.shift	shift 
-imenu Stmts.trap	trap 
-imenu Test.existence	[ -e  ]hi
-imenu Test.existence - file		[ -f  ]hi
-imenu Test.existence - file (not empty)	[ -s  ]hi
-imenu Test.existence - directory	[ -d  ]hi
-imenu Test.existence - executable	[ -x  ]hi
-imenu Test.existence - readable	[ -r  ]hi
-imenu Test.existence - writable	[ -w  ]hi
-imenu Test.String is empty [ x = "x$" ]hhi
-imenu Test.String is not empty [ x != "x$" ]hhi
-imenu Test.Strings is equal [ "" = "" ]hhhhhhhi
-imenu Test.Strings is not equal [ "" != "" ]hhhhhhhhi
-imenu Test.Values is greater than [  -gt  ]hhhhhhi
-imenu Test.Values is greater equal [  -ge  ]hhhhhhi
-imenu Test.Values is equal [  -eq  ]hhhhhhi
-imenu Test.Values is not equal [  -ne  ]hhhhhhi
-imenu Test.Values is less than [  -lt  ]hhhhhhi
-imenu Test.Values is less equal [  -le  ]hhhhhhi
-imenu ParmSub.Substitute word if parm not set ${:-}hhi
-imenu ParmSub.Set parm to word if not set ${:=}hhi
-imenu ParmSub.Substitute word if parm set else nothing ${:+}hhi
-imenu ParmSub.If parm not set print word and exit ${:?}hhi
-imenu SpShVars.Number of positional parameters ${#}
-imenu SpShVars.All positional parameters (quoted spaces) ${*}
-imenu SpShVars.All positional parameters (unquoted spaces) ${@}
-imenu SpShVars.Flags set ${-}
-imenu SpShVars.Return code of last command ${?}
-imenu SpShVars.Process number of this shell ${$}
-imenu SpShVars.Process number of last background command ${!}
-imenu Environ.HOME ${HOME}
-imenu Environ.PATH ${PATH}
-imenu Environ.CDPATH ${CDPATH}
-imenu Environ.MAIL ${MAIL}
-imenu Environ.MAILCHECK ${MAILCHECK}
-imenu Environ.PS1 ${PS1}
-imenu Environ.PS2 ${PS2}
-imenu Environ.IFS ${IFS}
-imenu Environ.SHACCT ${SHACCT}
-imenu Environ.SHELL ${SHELL}
-imenu Environ.LC_CTYPE ${LC_CTYPE}
-imenu Environ.LC_MESSAGES ${LC_MESSAGES}
-imenu Builtins.cd cd
-imenu Builtins.echo echo
-imenu Builtins.eval eval
-imenu Builtins.exec exec
-imenu Builtins.export export
-imenu Builtins.getopts getopts
-imenu Builtins.hash hash
+" Load the shellmenu package.
+" For those users who were loading the shellmenu plugin from here.
+packadd shellmenu

runtime/macros/swapmous.vim

@@ -1,22 +1,3 @@
-" These macros swap the left and right mouse buttons (for left handed)
-" Don't forget to do ":set mouse=a" or the mouse won't work at all
-noremap	 <LeftMouse>	<RightMouse>
-noremap	 <2-LeftMouse>	<2-RightMouse>
-noremap	 <3-LeftMouse>	<3-RightMouse>
-noremap	 <4-LeftMouse>	<4-RightMouse>
-noremap	 <LeftDrag>	<RightDrag>
-noremap	 <LeftRelease>	<RightRelease>
-noremap	 <RightMouse>	<LeftMouse>
-noremap	 <2-RightMouse>	<2-LeftMouse>
-noremap	 <3-RightMouse>	<3-LeftMouse>
-noremap	 <4-RightMouse>	<4-LeftMouse>
-noremap	 <RightDrag>	<LeftDrag>
-noremap	 <RightRelease>	<LeftRelease>
-noremap	 g<LeftMouse>	<C-RightMouse>
-noremap	 g<RightMouse>	<C-LeftMouse>
-noremap! <LeftMouse>	<RightMouse>
-noremap! <LeftDrag>	<RightDrag>
-noremap! <LeftRelease>	<RightRelease>
-noremap! <RightMouse>	<LeftMouse>
-noremap! <RightDrag>	<LeftDrag>
-noremap! <RightRelease>	<LeftRelease>
+" Load the swapmouse package.
+" For those users who were loading the swapmous plugin from here.
+packadd swapmouse

runtime/optwin.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " These commands create the option window.
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2015 Nov 10
+" Last Change:	2016 Mar 19
 
 " If there already is an option window, jump to that one.
 if bufwinnr("option-window") > 0
@@ -228,6 +228,8 @@ else
 endif
 call append("$", "runtimepath\tlist of directories used for runtime files and plugins")
 call <SID>OptionG("rtp", &rtp)
+call append("$", "packpath\tlist of directories used for plugin packages")
+call <SID>OptionG("pp", &pp)
 call append("$", "helpfile\tname of the main help file")
 call <SID>OptionG("hf", &hf)
 
@@ -1252,6 +1254,8 @@ if has("multi_byte")
   endif
   call append("$", "ambiwidth\twidth of ambiguous width characters")
   call <SID>OptionG("ambw", &ambw)
+  call append("$", "emoji\temoji characters are full width")
+  call <SID>BinOptionG("emo", &emo)
 endif
 
 

runtime/pack/dist/opt/dvorak/dvorak/disable.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+" Back to Qwerty keyboard after using Dvorak.
+
+iunmap a
+iunmap b
+iunmap c
+iunmap d
+iunmap e
+iunmap f
+iunmap g
+iunmap h
+iunmap i
+iunmap j
+iunmap k
+iunmap l
+iunmap m
+iunmap n
+iunmap o
+iunmap p
+iunmap q
+iunmap r
+iunmap s
+iunmap t
+iunmap u
+iunmap v
+iunmap w
+iunmap x
+iunmap y
+iunmap z
+iunmap ;
+iunmap '
+iunmap "
+iunmap ,
+iunmap .
+iunmap /
+iunmap A
+iunmap B
+iunmap C
+iunmap D
+iunmap E
+iunmap F
+iunmap G
+iunmap H
+iunmap I
+iunmap J
+iunmap K
+iunmap L
+iunmap M
+iunmap N
+iunmap O
+iunmap P
+iunmap Q
+iunmap R
+iunmap S
+iunmap T
+iunmap U
+iunmap V
+iunmap W
+iunmap X
+iunmap Y
+iunmap Z
+iunmap <
+iunmap >
+iunmap ?
+iunmap :
+iunmap [
+iunmap ]
+iunmap {
+iunmap }
+iunmap -
+iunmap _
+iunmap =
+iunmap +

runtime/pack/dist/opt/dvorak/dvorak/enable.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+" Dvorak keyboard, only in Insert mode.
+"
+" Change "inoremap" to "map!" to also use in Ex mode.
+" Also change disable.vim then: "iunmap" to "unmap!".
+"
+" You may want to add a list of map's too.
+
+inoremap a a
+inoremap b x
+inoremap c j
+inoremap d e
+inoremap e .
+inoremap f u
+inoremap g i
+inoremap h d
+inoremap i c
+inoremap j h
+inoremap k t
+inoremap l n
+inoremap m m
+inoremap n b
+inoremap o r
+inoremap p l
+inoremap q '
+inoremap r p
+inoremap s o
+inoremap t y
+inoremap u g
+inoremap v k
+inoremap w ,
+inoremap x q
+inoremap y f
+inoremap z ;
+inoremap ; s
+inoremap ' -
+inoremap " _
+inoremap , w
+inoremap . v
+inoremap / z
+inoremap A A
+inoremap B X
+inoremap C J
+inoremap D E
+inoremap E >
+inoremap F U
+inoremap G I
+inoremap H D
+inoremap I C
+inoremap J H
+inoremap K T
+inoremap L N
+inoremap M M
+inoremap N B
+inoremap O R
+inoremap P L
+inoremap Q "
+inoremap R P
+inoremap S O
+inoremap T Y
+inoremap U G
+inoremap V K
+inoremap W <
+inoremap X Q
+inoremap Y F
+inoremap Z :
+inoremap < W
+inoremap > V
+inoremap ? Z
+inoremap : S
+inoremap [ /
+inoremap ] =
+inoremap { ?
+inoremap } +
+inoremap - [
+inoremap _ {
+inoremap = ]
+inoremap + }

runtime/pack/dist/opt/dvorak/plugin/dvorak.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+" When using a dvorak keyboard this file may be of help to you.
+" These mappings have been made by Lawrence Kesteloot <kesteloo@cs.unc.edu>.
+" What they do is that the most often used keys, like hjkl, are put in a more
+" easy to use position.
+" It may take some time to learn using this.
+
+if exists("g:loaded_dvorak_plugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let g:loaded_dvorak_plugin = 1
+
+" Key to go into dvorak mode:
+map ,d :runtime dvorak/enable.vim<CR>
+
+" Key to get out of dvorak mode:
+map ,q :runtime dvorak/disable.vim<CR>

runtime/pack/dist/opt/editexisting/plugin/editexisting.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+" Vim Plugin:	Edit the file with an existing Vim if possible
+" Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar
+" Last Change:	2016 Mar 28
+
+" To use add ":packadd! editexisting" in your vimrc file.
+
+" This plugin serves two purposes:
+" 1. On startup, if we were invoked with one file name argument and the file
+"    is not modified then try to find another Vim instance that is editing
+"    this file.  If there is one then bring it to the foreground and exit.
+" 2. When a file is edited and a swap file exists for it, try finding that
+"    other Vim and bring it to the foreground.  Requires Vim 7, because it
+"    uses the SwapExists autocommand event.
+
+" Function that finds the Vim instance that is editing "filename" and brings
+" it to the foreground.
+func s:EditElsewhere(filename)
+  let fname_esc = substitute(a:filename, "'", "''", "g")
+
+  let servers = serverlist()
+  while servers != ''
+    " Get next server name in "servername"; remove it from "servers".
+    let i = match(servers, "\n")
+    if i == -1
+      let servername = servers
+      let servers = ''
+    else
+      let servername = strpart(servers, 0, i)
+      let servers = strpart(servers, i + 1)
+    endif
+
+    " Skip ourselves.
+    if servername ==? v:servername
+      continue
+    endif
+
+    " Check if this server is editing our file.
+    if remote_expr(servername, "bufloaded('" . fname_esc . "')")
+      " Yes, bring it to the foreground.
+      if has("win32")
+	call remote_foreground(servername)
+      endif
+      call remote_expr(servername, "foreground()")
+
+      if remote_expr(servername, "exists('*EditExisting')")
+	" Make sure the file is visible in a window (not hidden).
+	" If v:swapcommand exists and is set, send it to the server.
+	if exists("v:swapcommand")
+	  let c = substitute(v:swapcommand, "'", "''", "g")
+	  call remote_expr(servername, "EditExisting('" . fname_esc . "', '" . c . "')")
+	else
+	  call remote_expr(servername, "EditExisting('" . fname_esc . "', '')")
+	endif
+      endif
+
+      if !(has('vim_starting') && has('gui_running') && has('gui_win32'))
+	" Tell the user what is happening.  Not when the GUI is starting
+	" though, it would result in a message box.
+	echomsg "File is being edited by " . servername
+	sleep 2
+      endif
+      return 'q'
+    endif
+  endwhile
+  return ''
+endfunc
+
+" When the plugin is loaded and there is one file name argument: Find another
+" Vim server that is editing this file right now.
+if argc() == 1 && !&modified
+  if s:EditElsewhere(expand("%:p")) == 'q'
+    quit
+  endif
+endif
+
+" Setup for handling the situation that an existing swap file is found.
+try
+  au! SwapExists * let v:swapchoice = s:EditElsewhere(expand("<afile>:p"))
+catch
+  " Without SwapExists we don't do anything for ":edit" commands
+endtry
+
+" Function used on the server to make the file visible and possibly execute a
+" command.
+func! EditExisting(fname, command)
+  " Get the window number of the file in the current tab page.
+  let winnr = bufwinnr(a:fname)
+  if winnr <= 0
+    " Not found, look in other tab pages.
+    let bufnr = bufnr(a:fname)
+    for i in range(tabpagenr('$'))
+      if index(tabpagebuflist(i + 1), bufnr) >= 0
+	" Make this tab page the current one and find the window number.
+	exe 'tabnext ' . (i + 1)
+	let winnr = bufwinnr(a:fname)
+	break
+      endif
+    endfor
+  endif
+
+  if winnr > 0
+    exe winnr . "wincmd w"
+  elseif exists('*fnameescape')
+    exe "split " . fnameescape(a:fname)
+  else
+    exe "split " . escape(a:fname, " \t\n*?[{`$\\%#'\"|!<")
+  endif
+
+  if a:command != ''
+    exe "normal! " . a:command
+  endif
+
+  redraw
+endfunc

runtime/pack/dist/opt/justify/plugin/justify.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,316 @@
+" Function to left and right align text.
+"
+" Written by:	Preben "Peppe" Guldberg <c928400@student.dtu.dk>
+" Created:	980806 14:13 (or around that time anyway)
+" Revised:	001103 00:36 (See "Revisions" below)
+
+
+" function Justify( [ textwidth [, maxspaces [, indent] ] ] )
+"
+" Justify()  will  left  and  right  align  a  line  by  filling  in  an
+" appropriate amount of spaces.  Extra  spaces  are  added  to  existing
+" spaces starting from the right side of the line.  As an  example,  the
+" following documentation has been justified.
+"
+" The function takes the following arguments:
+
+" textwidth argument
+" ------------------
+" If not specified, the value of the 'textwidth'  option  is  used.   If
+" 'textwidth' is zero a value of 80 is used.
+"
+" Additionally the arguments 'tw' and '' are  accepted.   The  value  of
+" 'textwidth' will be used. These are handy, if you just want to specify
+" the maxspaces argument.
+
+" maxspaces argument
+" ------------------
+" If specified, alignment will only be done, if the  longest  space  run
+" after alignment is no longer than maxspaces.
+"
+" An argument of '' is accepted, should the user  like  to  specify  all
+" arguments.
+"
+" To aid user defined commands, negative  values  are  accepted  aswell.
+" Using a negative value specifies the default behaviour: any length  of
+" space runs will be used to justify the text.
+
+" indent argument
+" ---------------
+" This argument specifies how a line should be indented. The default  is
+" to keep the current indentation.
+"
+" Negative  values:  Keep  current   amount   of   leading   whitespace.
+" Positive values: Indent all lines with leading whitespace  using  this
+" amount of whitespace.
+"
+" Note that the value 0, needs to be quoted as  a  string.   This  value
+" leads to a left flushed text.
+"
+" Additionally units of  'shiftwidth'/'sw'  and  'tabstop'/'ts'  may  be
+" added. In this case, if the value of indent is positive, the amount of
+" whitespace to be  added  will  be  multiplied  by  the  value  of  the
+" 'shiftwidth' and 'tabstop' settings.  If these  units  are  used,  the
+"  argument must  be  given  as  a  string,  eg.   Justify('','','2sw').
+"
+" If the values of 'sw' or 'tw' are negative, they  are  treated  as  if
+" they were 0, which means that the text is flushed left.  There  is  no
+" check if a negative number prefix is used to  change  the  sign  of  a
+" negative 'sw' or 'ts' value.
+"
+" As with the other arguments,  ''  may  be  used  to  get  the  default
+" behaviour.
+
+
+" Notes:
+"
+" If the line, adjusted for space runs and leading/trailing  whitespace,
+" is wider than the used textwidth, the line will be left untouched  (no
+" whitespace removed).  This should be equivalent to  the  behaviour  of
+" :left, :right and :center.
+"
+" If the resulting line is shorter than the used textwidth  it  is  left
+" untouched.
+"
+" All space runs in the line  are  truncated  before  the  alignment  is
+" carried out.
+"
+" If you have set 'noexpandtab', :retab!  is used to replace space  runs
+"  with whitespace  using  the  value  of  'tabstop'.   This  should  be
+" conformant with :left, :right and :center.
+"
+" If joinspaces is set, an extra space is added after '.', '?' and  '!'.
+" If 'cpooptions' include 'j', extra space  is  only  added  after  '.'.
+" (This may on occasion conflict with maxspaces.)
+
+
+" Related mappings:
+"
+" Mappings that will align text using the current text width,  using  at
+" most four spaces in a  space  run  and  keeping  current  indentation.
+nmap _j :%call Justify('tw',4)<CR>
+vmap _j :call Justify('tw',4)<CR>
+"
+" Mappings that will remove space runs and format lines (might be useful
+" prior to aligning the text).
+nmap ,gq :%s/\s\+/ /g<CR>gq1G
+vmap ,gq :s/\s\+/ /g<CR>gvgq
+
+
+" User defined command:
+"
+" The following is an ex command that works as a shortcut to the Justify
+" function.  Arguments to Justify() can  be  added  after  the  command.
+com! -range -nargs=* Justify <line1>,<line2>call Justify(<f-args>)
+"
+" The following commands are all equivalent:
+"
+" 1. Simplest use of Justify():
+"       :call Justify()
+"       :Justify
+"
+" 2. The _j mapping above via the ex command:
+"       :%Justify tw 4
+"
+" 3.  Justify  visualised  text  at  72nd  column  while  indenting  all
+" previously indented text two shiftwidths
+"       :'<,'>call Justify(72,'','2sw')
+"       :'<,'>Justify 72 -1 2sw
+"
+" This documentation has been justified  using  the  following  command:
+":se et|kz|1;/^" function Justify(/+,'z-g/^" /s/^" //|call Justify(70,3)|s/^/" /
+
+" Revisions:
+" 001103: If 'joinspaces' was set, calculations could be wrong.
+"	  Tabs at start of line could also lead to errors.
+"	  Use setline() instead of "exec 's/foo/bar/' - safer.
+"	  Cleaned up the code a bit.
+"
+" Todo:	  Convert maps to the new script specific form
+
+" Error function
+function! Justify_error(message)
+    echohl Error
+    echo "Justify([tw, [maxspaces [, indent]]]): " . a:message
+    echohl None
+endfunction
+
+
+" Now for the real thing
+function! Justify(...) range
+
+    if a:0 > 3
+    call Justify_error("Too many arguments (max 3)")
+    return 1
+    endif
+
+    " Set textwidth (accept 'tw' and '' as arguments)
+    if a:0 >= 1
+	if a:1 =~ '^\(tw\)\=$'
+	    let tw = &tw
+	elseif a:1 =~ '^\d\+$'
+	    let tw = a:1
+	else
+	    call Justify_error("tw must be a number (>0), '' or 'tw'")
+	    return 2
+	endif
+    else
+	let tw = &tw
+    endif
+    if tw == 0
+	let tw = 80
+    endif
+
+    " Set maximum number of spaces between WORDs
+    if a:0 >= 2
+	if a:2 == ''
+	    let maxspaces = tw
+	elseif a:2 =~ '^-\d\+$'
+	    let maxspaces = tw
+	elseif a:2 =~ '^\d\+$'
+	    let maxspaces = a:2
+	else
+	    call Justify_error("maxspaces must be a number or ''")
+	    return 3
+	endif
+    else
+	let maxspaces = tw
+    endif
+    if maxspaces <= 1
+	call Justify_error("maxspaces should be larger than 1")
+	return 4
+    endif
+
+    " Set the indentation style (accept sw and ts units)
+    let indent_fix = ''
+    if a:0 >= 3
+	if (a:3 == '') || a:3 =~ '^-[1-9]\d*\(shiftwidth\|sw\|tabstop\|ts\)\=$'
+	    let indent = -1
+	elseif a:3 =~ '^-\=0\(shiftwidth\|sw\|tabstop\|ts\)\=$'
+	    let indent = 0
+	elseif a:3 =~ '^\d\+\(shiftwidth\|sw\|tabstop\|ts\)\=$'
+	    let indent = substitute(a:3, '\D', '', 'g')
+	elseif a:3 =~ '^\(shiftwidth\|sw\|tabstop\|ts\)$'
+	    let indent = 1
+	else
+	    call Justify_error("indent: a number with 'sw'/'ts' unit")
+	    return 5
+	endif
+	if indent >= 0
+	    while indent > 0
+		let indent_fix = indent_fix . ' '
+		let indent = indent - 1
+	    endwhile
+	    let indent_sw = 0
+	    if a:3 =~ '\(shiftwidth\|sw\)'
+		let indent_sw = &sw
+	    elseif a:3 =~ '\(tabstop\|ts\)'
+		let indent_sw = &ts
+	    endif
+	    let indent_fix2 = ''
+	    while indent_sw > 0
+		let indent_fix2 = indent_fix2 . indent_fix
+		let indent_sw = indent_sw - 1
+	    endwhile
+	    let indent_fix = indent_fix2
+	endif
+    else
+	let indent = -1
+    endif
+
+    " Avoid substitution reports
+    let save_report = &report
+    set report=1000000
+
+    " Check 'joinspaces' and 'cpo'
+    if &js == 1
+	if &cpo =~ 'j'
+	    let join_str = '\(\. \)'
+	else
+	    let join_str = '\([.!?!] \)'
+	endif
+    endif
+
+    let cur = a:firstline
+    while cur <= a:lastline
+
+	let str_orig = getline(cur)
+	let save_et = &et
+	set et
+	exec cur . "retab"
+	let &et = save_et
+	let str = getline(cur)
+
+	let indent_str = indent_fix
+	let indent_n = strlen(indent_str)
+	" Shall we remember the current indentation
+	if indent < 0
+	    let indent_orig = matchstr(str_orig, '^\s*')
+	    if strlen(indent_orig) > 0
+		let indent_str = indent_orig
+		let indent_n = strlen(matchstr(str, '^\s*'))
+	    endif
+	endif
+
+	" Trim trailing, leading and running whitespace
+	let str = substitute(str, '\s\+$', '', '')
+	let str = substitute(str, '^\s\+', '', '')
+	let str = substitute(str, '\s\+', ' ', 'g')
+	let str_n = strdisplaywidth(str)
+
+	" Possible addition of space after punctuation
+	if exists("join_str")
+	    let str = substitute(str, join_str, '\1 ', 'g')
+	endif
+	let join_n = strdisplaywidth(str) - str_n
+
+	" Can extraspaces be added?
+	" Note that str_n may be less than strlen(str) [joinspaces above]
+	if strdisplaywidth(str) <= tw - indent_n && str_n > 0
+	    " How many spaces should be added
+	    let s_add = tw - str_n - indent_n - join_n
+	    let s_nr  = strlen(substitute(str, '\S', '', 'g') ) - join_n
+	    let s_dup = s_add / s_nr
+	    let s_mod = s_add % s_nr
+
+	    " Test if the changed line fits with tw
+	    if 0 <= (str_n + (maxspaces - 1)*s_nr + indent_n) - tw
+
+		" Duplicate spaces
+		while s_dup > 0
+		    let str = substitute(str, '\( \+\)', ' \1', 'g')
+		    let s_dup = s_dup - 1
+		endwhile
+
+		" Add extra spaces from the end
+		while s_mod > 0
+		    let str = substitute(str, '\(\(\s\+\S\+\)\{' . s_mod .  '}\)$', ' \1', '')
+		    let s_mod = s_mod - 1
+		endwhile
+
+		" Indent the line
+		if indent_n > 0
+		    let str = substitute(str, '^', indent_str, '' )
+		endif
+
+		" Replace the line
+		call setline(cur, str)
+
+		" Convert to whitespace
+		if &et == 0
+		    exec cur . 'retab!'
+		endif
+
+	    endif   " Change of line
+	endif	" Possible change
+
+	let cur = cur + 1
+    endwhile
+
+    norm ^
+
+    let &report = save_report
+
+endfunction
+
+" EOF	vim: tw=78 ts=8 sw=4 sts=4 noet ai

runtime/pack/dist/opt/matchit/doc/tags

@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+:MatchDebug	matchit.txt	/*:MatchDebug*
+MatchError	matchit.txt	/*MatchError*
+[%	matchit.txt	/*[%*
+]%	matchit.txt	/*]%*
+b:match_col	matchit.txt	/*b:match_col*
+b:match_debug	matchit.txt	/*b:match_debug*
+b:match_ignorecase	matchit.txt	/*b:match_ignorecase*
+b:match_ini	matchit.txt	/*b:match_ini*
+b:match_iniBR	matchit.txt	/*b:match_iniBR*
+b:match_match	matchit.txt	/*b:match_match*
+b:match_pat	matchit.txt	/*b:match_pat*
+b:match_skip	matchit.txt	/*b:match_skip*
+b:match_table	matchit.txt	/*b:match_table*
+b:match_tail	matchit.txt	/*b:match_tail*
+b:match_wholeBR	matchit.txt	/*b:match_wholeBR*
+b:match_word	matchit.txt	/*b:match_word*
+b:match_words	matchit.txt	/*b:match_words*
+g%	matchit.txt	/*g%*
+matchit	matchit.txt	/*matchit*
+matchit-%	matchit.txt	/*matchit-%*
+matchit-\1	matchit.txt	/*matchit-\\1*
+matchit-activate	matchit.txt	/*matchit-activate*
+matchit-backref	matchit.txt	/*matchit-backref*
+matchit-bugs	matchit.txt	/*matchit-bugs*
+matchit-choose	matchit.txt	/*matchit-choose*
+matchit-configure	matchit.txt	/*matchit-configure*
+matchit-debug	matchit.txt	/*matchit-debug*
+matchit-details	matchit.txt	/*matchit-details*
+matchit-highlight	matchit.txt	/*matchit-highlight*
+matchit-hl	matchit.txt	/*matchit-hl*
+matchit-intro	matchit.txt	/*matchit-intro*
+matchit-languages	matchit.txt	/*matchit-languages*
+matchit-modes	matchit.txt	/*matchit-modes*
+matchit-newlang	matchit.txt	/*matchit-newlang*
+matchit-o_%	matchit.txt	/*matchit-o_%*
+matchit-parse	matchit.txt	/*matchit-parse*
+matchit-s:notend	matchit.txt	/*matchit-s:notend*
+matchit-s:sol	matchit.txt	/*matchit-s:sol*
+matchit-spaces	matchit.txt	/*matchit-spaces*
+matchit-troubleshoot	matchit.txt	/*matchit-troubleshoot*
+matchit-v_%	matchit.txt	/*matchit-v_%*
+matchit.txt	matchit.txt	/*matchit.txt*
+matchit.vim	matchit.txt	/*matchit.vim*
+o_[%	matchit.txt	/*o_[%*
+o_]%	matchit.txt	/*o_]%*
+o_g%	matchit.txt	/*o_g%*
+v_[%	matchit.txt	/*v_[%*
+v_]%	matchit.txt	/*v_]%*
+v_a%	matchit.txt	/*v_a%*
+v_g%	matchit.txt	/*v_g%*

runtime/pack/dist/opt/matchit/plugin/matchit.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,813 @@
+"  matchit.vim: (global plugin) Extended "%" matching
+"  Last Change: Fri Jan 25 10:00 AM 2008 EST
+"  Maintainer:  Benji Fisher PhD   <benji@member.AMS.org>
+"  Version:     1.13.2, for Vim 6.3+
+"  URL:		http://www.vim.org/script.php?script_id=39
+
+" Documentation:
+"  The documentation is in a separate file, matchit.txt .
+
+" Credits:
+"  Vim editor by Bram Moolenaar (Thanks, Bram!)
+"  Original script and design by Raul Segura Acevedo
+"  Support for comments by Douglas Potts
+"  Support for back references and other improvements by Benji Fisher
+"  Support for many languages by Johannes Zellner
+"  Suggestions for improvement, bug reports, and support for additional
+"  languages by Jordi-Albert Batalla, Neil Bird, Servatius Brandt, Mark
+"  Collett, Stephen Wall, Dany St-Amant, Yuheng Xie, and Johannes Zellner.
+
+" Debugging:
+"  If you'd like to try the built-in debugging commands...
+"   :MatchDebug      to activate debugging for the current buffer
+"  This saves the values of several key script variables as buffer-local
+"  variables.  See the MatchDebug() function, below, for details.
+
+" TODO:  I should think about multi-line patterns for b:match_words.
+"   This would require an option:  how many lines to scan (default 1).
+"   This would be useful for Python, maybe also for *ML.
+" TODO:  Maybe I should add a menu so that people will actually use some of
+"   the features that I have implemented.
+" TODO:  Eliminate the MultiMatch function.  Add yet another argument to
+"   Match_wrapper() instead.
+" TODO:  Allow :let b:match_words = '\(\(foo\)\(bar\)\):\3\2:end\1'
+" TODO:  Make backrefs safer by using '\V' (very no-magic).
+" TODO:  Add a level of indirection, so that custom % scripts can use my
+"   work but extend it.
+
+" allow user to prevent loading
+" and prevent duplicate loading
+if exists("loaded_matchit") || &cp
+  finish
+endif
+let loaded_matchit = 1
+let s:last_mps = ""
+let s:last_words = ":"
+
+let s:save_cpo = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+nnoremap <silent> %  :<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',1,'n') <CR>
+nnoremap <silent> g% :<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',0,'n') <CR>
+vnoremap <silent> %  :<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',1,'v') <CR>m'gv``
+vnoremap <silent> g% :<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',0,'v') <CR>m'gv``
+onoremap <silent> %  v:<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',1,'o') <CR>
+onoremap <silent> g% v:<C-U>call <SID>Match_wrapper('',0,'o') <CR>
+
+" Analogues of [{ and ]} using matching patterns:
+nnoremap <silent> [% :<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("bW", "n") <CR>
+nnoremap <silent> ]% :<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("W",  "n") <CR>
+vmap [% <Esc>[%m'gv``
+vmap ]% <Esc>]%m'gv``
+" vnoremap <silent> [% :<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("bW", "v") <CR>m'gv``
+" vnoremap <silent> ]% :<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("W",  "v") <CR>m'gv``
+onoremap <silent> [% v:<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("bW", "o") <CR>
+onoremap <silent> ]% v:<C-U>call <SID>MultiMatch("W",  "o") <CR>
+
+" text object:
+vmap a% <Esc>[%v]%
+
+" Auto-complete mappings:  (not yet "ready for prime time")
+" TODO Read :help write-plugin for the "right" way to let the user
+" specify a key binding.
+"   let g:match_auto = '<C-]>'
+"   let g:match_autoCR = '<C-CR>'
+" if exists("g:match_auto")
+"   execute "inoremap " . g:match_auto . ' x<Esc>"=<SID>Autocomplete()<CR>Pls'
+" endif
+" if exists("g:match_autoCR")
+"   execute "inoremap " . g:match_autoCR . ' <CR><C-R>=<SID>Autocomplete()<CR>'
+" endif
+" if exists("g:match_gthhoh")
+"   execute "inoremap " . g:match_gthhoh . ' <C-O>:call <SID>Gthhoh()<CR>'
+" endif " gthhoh = "Get the heck out of here!"
+
+let s:notslash = '\\\@<!\%(\\\\\)*'
+
+function! s:Match_wrapper(word, forward, mode) range
+  " In s:CleanUp(), :execute "set" restore_options .
+  let restore_options = (&ic ? " " : " no") . "ignorecase"
+  if exists("b:match_ignorecase")
+    let &ignorecase = b:match_ignorecase
+  endif
+  let restore_options = " ve=" . &ve . restore_options
+  set ve=
+  " If this function was called from Visual mode, make sure that the cursor
+  " is at the correct end of the Visual range:
+  if a:mode == "v"
+    execute "normal! gv\<Esc>"
+  endif
+  " In s:CleanUp(), we may need to check whether the cursor moved forward.
+  let startline = line(".")
+  let startcol = col(".")
+  " Use default behavior if called with a count.
+  if v:count
+    exe "normal! " . v:count . "%"
+    return s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol)
+  end
+
+  " First step:  if not already done, set the script variables
+  "   s:do_BR	flag for whether there are backrefs
+  "   s:pat	parsed version of b:match_words
+  "   s:all	regexp based on s:pat and the default groups
+  "
+  if !exists("b:match_words") || b:match_words == ""
+    let match_words = ""
+    " Allow b:match_words = "GetVimMatchWords()" .
+  elseif b:match_words =~ ":"
+    let match_words = b:match_words
+  else
+    execute "let match_words =" b:match_words
+  endif
+" Thanks to Preben "Peppe" Guldberg and Bram Moolenaar for this suggestion!
+  if (match_words != s:last_words) || (&mps != s:last_mps) ||
+    \ exists("b:match_debug")
+    let s:last_words = match_words
+    let s:last_mps = &mps
+    " The next several lines were here before
+    " BF started messing with this script.
+    " quote the special chars in 'matchpairs', replace [,:] with \| and then
+    " append the builtin pairs (/*, */, #if, #ifdef, #else, #elif, #endif)
+    " let default = substitute(escape(&mps, '[$^.*~\\/?]'), '[,:]\+',
+    "  \ '\\|', 'g').'\|\/\*\|\*\/\|#if\>\|#ifdef\>\|#else\>\|#elif\>\|#endif\>'
+    let default = escape(&mps, '[$^.*~\\/?]') . (strlen(&mps) ? "," : "") .
+      \ '\/\*:\*\/,#\s*if\%(def\)\=:#\s*else\>:#\s*elif\>:#\s*endif\>'
+    " s:all = pattern with all the keywords
+    let match_words = match_words . (strlen(match_words) ? "," : "") . default
+    if match_words !~ s:notslash . '\\\d'
+      let s:do_BR = 0
+      let s:pat = match_words
+    else
+      let s:do_BR = 1
+      let s:pat = s:ParseWords(match_words)
+    endif
+    let s:all = substitute(s:pat, s:notslash . '\zs[,:]\+', '\\|', 'g')
+    let s:all = '\%(' . s:all . '\)'
+    " let s:all = '\%(' . substitute(s:all, '\\\ze[,:]', '', 'g') . '\)'
+    if exists("b:match_debug")
+      let b:match_pat = s:pat
+    endif
+  endif
+
+  " Second step:  set the following local variables:
+  "     matchline = line on which the cursor started
+  "     curcol    = number of characters before match
+  "     prefix    = regexp for start of line to start of match
+  "     suffix    = regexp for end of match to end of line
+  " Require match to end on or after the cursor and prefer it to
+  " start on or before the cursor.
+  let matchline = getline(startline)
+  if a:word != ''
+    " word given
+    if a:word !~ s:all
+      echohl WarningMsg|echo 'Missing rule for word:"'.a:word.'"'|echohl NONE
+      return s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol)
+    endif
+    let matchline = a:word
+    let curcol = 0
+    let prefix = '^\%('
+    let suffix = '\)$'
+  " Now the case when "word" is not given
+  else	" Find the match that ends on or after the cursor and set curcol.
+    let regexp = s:Wholematch(matchline, s:all, startcol-1)
+    let curcol = match(matchline, regexp)
+    " If there is no match, give up.
+    if curcol == -1
+      return s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol)
+    endif
+    let endcol = matchend(matchline, regexp)
+    let suf = strlen(matchline) - endcol
+    let prefix = (curcol ? '^.*\%'  . (curcol + 1) . 'c\%(' : '^\%(')
+    let suffix = (suf ? '\)\%' . (endcol + 1) . 'c.*$'  : '\)$')
+  endif
+  if exists("b:match_debug")
+    let b:match_match = matchstr(matchline, regexp)
+    let b:match_col = curcol+1
+  endif
+
+  " Third step:  Find the group and single word that match, and the original
+  " (backref) versions of these.  Then, resolve the backrefs.
+  " Set the following local variable:
+  " group = colon-separated list of patterns, one of which matches
+  "       = ini:mid:fin or ini:fin
+  "
+  " Reconstruct the version with unresolved backrefs.
+  let patBR = substitute(match_words.',',
+    \ s:notslash.'\zs[,:]*,[,:]*', ',', 'g')
+  let patBR = substitute(patBR, s:notslash.'\zs:\{2,}', ':', 'g')
+  " Now, set group and groupBR to the matching group: 'if:endif' or
+  " 'while:endwhile' or whatever.  A bit of a kluge:  s:Choose() returns
+  " group . "," . groupBR, and we pick it apart.
+  let group = s:Choose(s:pat, matchline, ",", ":", prefix, suffix, patBR)
+  let i = matchend(group, s:notslash . ",")
+  let groupBR = strpart(group, i)
+  let group = strpart(group, 0, i-1)
+  " Now, matchline =~ prefix . substitute(group,':','\|','g') . suffix
+  if s:do_BR " Do the hard part:  resolve those backrefs!
+    let group = s:InsertRefs(groupBR, prefix, group, suffix, matchline)
+  endif
+  if exists("b:match_debug")
+    let b:match_wholeBR = groupBR
+    let i = matchend(groupBR, s:notslash . ":")
+    let b:match_iniBR = strpart(groupBR, 0, i-1)
+  endif
+
+  " Fourth step:  Set the arguments for searchpair().
+  let i = matchend(group, s:notslash . ":")
+  let j = matchend(group, '.*' . s:notslash . ":")
+  let ini = strpart(group, 0, i-1)
+  let mid = substitute(strpart(group, i,j-i-1), s:notslash.'\zs:', '\\|', 'g')
+  let fin = strpart(group, j)
+  "Un-escape the remaining , and : characters.
+  let ini = substitute(ini, s:notslash . '\zs\\\(:\|,\)', '\1', 'g')
+  let mid = substitute(mid, s:notslash . '\zs\\\(:\|,\)', '\1', 'g')
+  let fin = substitute(fin, s:notslash . '\zs\\\(:\|,\)', '\1', 'g')
+  " searchpair() requires that these patterns avoid \(\) groups.
+  let ini = substitute(ini, s:notslash . '\zs\\(', '\\%(', 'g')
+  let mid = substitute(mid, s:notslash . '\zs\\(', '\\%(', 'g')
+  let fin = substitute(fin, s:notslash . '\zs\\(', '\\%(', 'g')
+  " Set mid.  This is optimized for readability, not micro-efficiency!
+  if a:forward && matchline =~ prefix . fin . suffix
+    \ || !a:forward && matchline =~ prefix . ini . suffix
+    let mid = ""
+  endif
+  " Set flag.  This is optimized for readability, not micro-efficiency!
+  if a:forward && matchline =~ prefix . fin . suffix
+    \ || !a:forward && matchline !~ prefix . ini . suffix
+    let flag = "bW"
+  else
+    let flag = "W"
+  endif
+  " Set skip.
+  if exists("b:match_skip")
+    let skip = b:match_skip
+  elseif exists("b:match_comment") " backwards compatibility and testing!
+    let skip = "r:" . b:match_comment
+  else
+    let skip = 's:comment\|string'
+  endif
+  let skip = s:ParseSkip(skip)
+  if exists("b:match_debug")
+    let b:match_ini = ini
+    let b:match_tail = (strlen(mid) ? mid.'\|' : '') . fin
+  endif
+
+  " Fifth step:  actually start moving the cursor and call searchpair().
+  " Later, :execute restore_cursor to get to the original screen.
+  let restore_cursor = virtcol(".") . "|"
+  normal! g0
+  let restore_cursor = line(".") . "G" .  virtcol(".") . "|zs" . restore_cursor
+  normal! H
+  let restore_cursor = "normal!" . line(".") . "Gzt" . restore_cursor
+  execute restore_cursor
+  call cursor(0, curcol + 1)
+  " normal! 0
+  " if curcol
+  "   execute "normal!" . curcol . "l"
+  " endif
+  if skip =~ 'synID' && !(has("syntax") && exists("g:syntax_on"))
+    let skip = "0"
+  else
+    execute "if " . skip . "| let skip = '0' | endif"
+  endif
+  let sp_return = searchpair(ini, mid, fin, flag, skip)
+  let final_position = "call cursor(" . line(".") . "," . col(".") . ")"
+  " Restore cursor position and original screen.
+  execute restore_cursor
+  normal! m'
+  if sp_return > 0
+    execute final_position
+  endif
+  return s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol, mid.'\|'.fin)
+endfun
+
+" Restore options and do some special handling for Operator-pending mode.
+" The optional argument is the tail of the matching group.
+fun! s:CleanUp(options, mode, startline, startcol, ...)
+  execute "set" a:options
+  " Open folds, if appropriate.
+  if a:mode != "o"
+    if &foldopen =~ "percent"
+      normal! zv
+    endif
+    " In Operator-pending mode, we want to include the whole match
+    " (for example, d%).
+    " This is only a problem if we end up moving in the forward direction.
+  elseif (a:startline < line(".")) ||
+	\ (a:startline == line(".") && a:startcol < col("."))
+    if a:0
+      " Check whether the match is a single character.  If not, move to the
+      " end of the match.
+      let matchline = getline(".")
+      let currcol = col(".")
+      let regexp = s:Wholematch(matchline, a:1, currcol-1)
+      let endcol = matchend(matchline, regexp)
+      if endcol > currcol  " This is NOT off by one!
+	call cursor(0, endcol)
+      endif
+    endif " a:0
+  endif " a:mode != "o" && etc.
+  return 0
+endfun
+
+" Example (simplified HTML patterns):  if
+"   a:groupBR	= '<\(\k\+\)>:</\1>'
+"   a:prefix	= '^.\{3}\('
+"   a:group	= '<\(\k\+\)>:</\(\k\+\)>'
+"   a:suffix	= '\).\{2}$'
+"   a:matchline	=  "123<tag>12" or "123</tag>12"
+" then extract "tag" from a:matchline and return "<tag>:</tag>" .
+fun! s:InsertRefs(groupBR, prefix, group, suffix, matchline)
+  if a:matchline !~ a:prefix .
+    \ substitute(a:group, s:notslash . '\zs:', '\\|', 'g') . a:suffix
+    return a:group
+  endif
+  let i = matchend(a:groupBR, s:notslash . ':')
+  let ini = strpart(a:groupBR, 0, i-1)
+  let tailBR = strpart(a:groupBR, i)
+  let word = s:Choose(a:group, a:matchline, ":", "", a:prefix, a:suffix,
+    \ a:groupBR)
+  let i = matchend(word, s:notslash . ":")
+  let wordBR = strpart(word, i)
+  let word = strpart(word, 0, i-1)
+  " Now, a:matchline =~ a:prefix . word . a:suffix
+  if wordBR != ini
+    let table = s:Resolve(ini, wordBR, "table")
+  else
+    " let table = "----------"
+    let table = ""
+    let d = 0
+    while d < 10
+      if tailBR =~ s:notslash . '\\' . d
+	" let table[d] = d
+	let table = table . d
+      else
+	let table = table . "-"
+      endif
+      let d = d + 1
+    endwhile
+  endif
+  let d = 9
+  while d
+    if table[d] != "-"
+      let backref = substitute(a:matchline, a:prefix.word.a:suffix,
+	\ '\'.table[d], "")
+	" Are there any other characters that should be escaped?
+      let backref = escape(backref, '*,:')
+      execute s:Ref(ini, d, "start", "len")
+      let ini = strpart(ini, 0, start) . backref . strpart(ini, start+len)
+      let tailBR = substitute(tailBR, s:notslash . '\zs\\' . d,
+	\ escape(backref, '\\&'), 'g')
+    endif
+    let d = d-1
+  endwhile
+  if exists("b:match_debug")
+    if s:do_BR
+      let b:match_table = table
+      let b:match_word = word
+    else
+      let b:match_table = ""
+      let b:match_word = ""
+    endif
+  endif
+  return ini . ":" . tailBR
+endfun
+
+" Input a comma-separated list of groups with backrefs, such as
+"   a:groups = '\(foo\):end\1,\(bar\):end\1'
+" and return a comma-separated list of groups with backrefs replaced:
+"   return '\(foo\):end\(foo\),\(bar\):end\(bar\)'
+fun! s:ParseWords(groups)
+  let groups = substitute(a:groups.",", s:notslash.'\zs[,:]*,[,:]*', ',', 'g')
+  let groups = substitute(groups, s:notslash . '\zs:\{2,}', ':', 'g')
+  let parsed = ""
+  while groups =~ '[^,:]'
+    let i = matchend(groups, s:notslash . ':')
+    let j = matchend(groups, s:notslash . ',')
+    let ini = strpart(groups, 0, i-1)
+    let tail = strpart(groups, i, j-i-1) . ":"
+    let groups = strpart(groups, j)
+    let parsed = parsed . ini
+    let i = matchend(tail, s:notslash . ':')
+    while i != -1
+      " In 'if:else:endif', ini='if' and word='else' and then word='endif'.
+      let word = strpart(tail, 0, i-1)
+      let tail = strpart(tail, i)
+      let i = matchend(tail, s:notslash . ':')
+      let parsed = parsed . ":" . s:Resolve(ini, word, "word")
+    endwhile " Now, tail has been used up.
+    let parsed = parsed . ","
+  endwhile " groups =~ '[^,:]'
+  let parsed = substitute(parsed, ',$', '', '')
+  return parsed
+endfun
+
+" TODO I think this can be simplified and/or made more efficient.
+" TODO What should I do if a:start is out of range?
+" Return a regexp that matches all of a:string, such that
+" matchstr(a:string, regexp) represents the match for a:pat that starts
+" as close to a:start as possible, before being preferred to after, and
+" ends after a:start .
+" Usage:
+" let regexp = s:Wholematch(getline("."), 'foo\|bar', col(".")-1)
+" let i      = match(getline("."), regexp)
+" let j      = matchend(getline("."), regexp)
+" let match  = matchstr(getline("."), regexp)
+fun! s:Wholematch(string, pat, start)
+  let group = '\%(' . a:pat . '\)'
+  let prefix = (a:start ? '\(^.*\%<' . (a:start + 2) . 'c\)\zs' : '^')
+  let len = strlen(a:string)
+  let suffix = (a:start+1 < len ? '\(\%>'.(a:start+1).'c.*$\)\@=' : '$')
+  if a:string !~ prefix . group . suffix
+    let prefix = ''
+  endif
+  return prefix . group . suffix
+endfun
+
+" No extra arguments:  s:Ref(string, d) will
+" find the d'th occurrence of '\(' and return it, along with everything up
+" to and including the matching '\)'.
+" One argument:  s:Ref(string, d, "start") returns the index of the start
+" of the d'th '\(' and any other argument returns the length of the group.
+" Two arguments:  s:Ref(string, d, "foo", "bar") returns a string to be
+" executed, having the effect of
+"   :let foo = s:Ref(string, d, "start")
+"   :let bar = s:Ref(string, d, "len")
+fun! s:Ref(string, d, ...)
+  let len = strlen(a:string)
+  if a:d == 0
+    let start = 0
+  else
+    let cnt = a:d
+    let match = a:string
+    while cnt
+      let cnt = cnt - 1
+      let index = matchend(match, s:notslash . '\\(')
+      if index == -1
+	return ""
+      endif
+      let match = strpart(match, index)
+    endwhile
+    let start = len - strlen(match)
+    if a:0 == 1 && a:1 == "start"
+      return start - 2
+    endif
+    let cnt = 1
+    while cnt
+      let index = matchend(match, s:notslash . '\\(\|\\)') - 1
+      if index == -2
+	return ""
+      endif
+      " Increment if an open, decrement if a ')':
+      let cnt = cnt + (match[index]=="(" ? 1 : -1)  " ')'
+      " let cnt = stridx('0(', match[index]) + cnt
+      let match = strpart(match, index+1)
+    endwhile
+    let start = start - 2
+    let len = len - start - strlen(match)
+  endif
+  if a:0 == 1
+    return len
+  elseif a:0 == 2
+    return "let " . a:1 . "=" . start . "| let " . a:2 . "=" . len
+  else
+    return strpart(a:string, start, len)
+  endif
+endfun
+
+" Count the number of disjoint copies of pattern in string.
+" If the pattern is a literal string and contains no '0' or '1' characters
+" then s:Count(string, pattern, '0', '1') should be faster than
+" s:Count(string, pattern).
+fun! s:Count(string, pattern, ...)
+  let pat = escape(a:pattern, '\\')
+  if a:0 > 1
+    let foo = substitute(a:string, '[^'.a:pattern.']', "a:1", "g")
+    let foo = substitute(a:string, pat, a:2, "g")
+    let foo = substitute(foo, '[^' . a:2 . ']', "", "g")
+    return strlen(foo)
+  endif
+  let result = 0
+  let foo = a:string
+  let index = matchend(foo, pat)
+  while index != -1
+    let result = result + 1
+    let foo = strpart(foo, index)
+    let index = matchend(foo, pat)
+  endwhile
+  return result
+endfun
+
+" s:Resolve('\(a\)\(b\)', '\(c\)\2\1\1\2') should return table.word, where
+" word = '\(c\)\(b\)\(a\)\3\2' and table = '-32-------'.  That is, the first
+" '\1' in target is replaced by '\(a\)' in word, table[1] = 3, and this
+" indicates that all other instances of '\1' in target are to be replaced
+" by '\3'.  The hard part is dealing with nesting...
+" Note that ":" is an illegal character for source and target,
+" unless it is preceded by "\".
+fun! s:Resolve(source, target, output)
+  let word = a:target
+  let i = matchend(word, s:notslash . '\\\d') - 1
+  let table = "----------"
+  while i != -2 " There are back references to be replaced.
+    let d = word[i]
+    let backref = s:Ref(a:source, d)
+    " The idea is to replace '\d' with backref.  Before we do this,
+    " replace any \(\) groups in backref with :1, :2, ... if they
+    " correspond to the first, second, ... group already inserted
+    " into backref.  Later, replace :1 with \1 and so on.  The group
+    " number w+b within backref corresponds to the group number
+    " s within a:source.
+    " w = number of '\(' in word before the current one
+    let w = s:Count(
+    \ substitute(strpart(word, 0, i-1), '\\\\', '', 'g'), '\(', '1')
+    let b = 1 " number of the current '\(' in backref
+    let s = d " number of the current '\(' in a:source
+    while b <= s:Count(substitute(backref, '\\\\', '', 'g'), '\(', '1')
+    \ && s < 10
+      if table[s] == "-"
+	if w + b < 10
+	  " let table[s] = w + b
+	  let table = strpart(table, 0, s) . (w+b) . strpart(table, s+1)
+	endif
+	let b = b + 1
+	let s = s + 1
+      else
+	execute s:Ref(backref, b, "start", "len")
+	let ref = strpart(backref, start, len)
+	let backref = strpart(backref, 0, start) . ":". table[s]
+	\ . strpart(backref, start+len)
+	let s = s + s:Count(substitute(ref, '\\\\', '', 'g'), '\(', '1')
+      endif
+    endwhile
+    let word = strpart(word, 0, i-1) . backref . strpart(word, i+1)
+    let i = matchend(word, s:notslash . '\\\d') - 1
+  endwhile
+  let word = substitute(word, s:notslash . '\zs:', '\\', 'g')
+  if a:output == "table"
+    return table
+  elseif a:output == "word"
+    return word
+  else
+    return table . word
+  endif
+endfun
+
+" Assume a:comma = ",".  Then the format for a:patterns and a:1 is
+"   a:patterns = "<pat1>,<pat2>,..."
+"   a:1 = "<alt1>,<alt2>,..."
+" If <patn> is the first pattern that matches a:string then return <patn>
+" if no optional arguments are given; return <patn>,<altn> if a:1 is given.
+fun! s:Choose(patterns, string, comma, branch, prefix, suffix, ...)
+  let tail = (a:patterns =~ a:comma."$" ? a:patterns : a:patterns . a:comma)
+  let i = matchend(tail, s:notslash . a:comma)
+  if a:0
+    let alttail = (a:1 =~ a:comma."$" ? a:1 : a:1 . a:comma)
+    let j = matchend(alttail, s:notslash . a:comma)
+  endif
+  let current = strpart(tail, 0, i-1)
+  if a:branch == ""
+    let currpat = current
+  else
+    let currpat = substitute(current, s:notslash . a:branch, '\\|', 'g')
+  endif
+  while a:string !~ a:prefix . currpat . a:suffix
+    let tail = strpart(tail, i)
+    let i = matchend(tail, s:notslash . a:comma)
+    if i == -1
+      return -1
+    endif
+    let current = strpart(tail, 0, i-1)
+    if a:branch == ""
+      let currpat = current
+    else
+      let currpat = substitute(current, s:notslash . a:branch, '\\|', 'g')
+    endif
+    if a:0
+      let alttail = strpart(alttail, j)
+      let j = matchend(alttail, s:notslash . a:comma)
+    endif
+  endwhile
+  if a:0
+    let current = current . a:comma . strpart(alttail, 0, j-1)
+  endif
+  return current
+endfun
+
+" Call this function to turn on debugging information.  Every time the main
+" script is run, buffer variables will be saved.  These can be used directly
+" or viewed using the menu items below.
+if !exists(":MatchDebug")
+  command! -nargs=0 MatchDebug call s:Match_debug()
+endif
+
+fun! s:Match_debug()
+  let b:match_debug = 1	" Save debugging information.
+  " pat = all of b:match_words with backrefs parsed
+  amenu &Matchit.&pat	:echo b:match_pat<CR>
+  " match = bit of text that is recognized as a match
+  amenu &Matchit.&match	:echo b:match_match<CR>
+  " curcol = cursor column of the start of the matching text
+  amenu &Matchit.&curcol	:echo b:match_col<CR>
+  " wholeBR = matching group, original version
+  amenu &Matchit.wh&oleBR	:echo b:match_wholeBR<CR>
+  " iniBR = 'if' piece, original version
+  amenu &Matchit.ini&BR	:echo b:match_iniBR<CR>
+  " ini = 'if' piece, with all backrefs resolved from match
+  amenu &Matchit.&ini	:echo b:match_ini<CR>
+  " tail = 'else\|endif' piece, with all backrefs resolved from match
+  amenu &Matchit.&tail	:echo b:match_tail<CR>
+  " fin = 'endif' piece, with all backrefs resolved from match
+  amenu &Matchit.&word	:echo b:match_word<CR>
+  " '\'.d in ini refers to the same thing as '\'.table[d] in word.
+  amenu &Matchit.t&able	:echo '0:' . b:match_table . ':9'<CR>
+endfun
+
+" Jump to the nearest unmatched "(" or "if" or "<tag>" if a:spflag == "bW"
+" or the nearest unmatched "</tag>" or "endif" or ")" if a:spflag == "W".
+" Return a "mark" for the original position, so that
+"   let m = MultiMatch("bW", "n") ... execute m
+" will return to the original position.  If there is a problem, do not
+" move the cursor and return "", unless a count is given, in which case
+" go up or down as many levels as possible and again return "".
+" TODO This relies on the same patterns as % matching.  It might be a good
+" idea to give it its own matching patterns.
+fun! s:MultiMatch(spflag, mode)
+  if !exists("b:match_words") || b:match_words == ""
+    return ""
+  end
+  let restore_options = (&ic ? "" : "no") . "ignorecase"
+  if exists("b:match_ignorecase")
+    let &ignorecase = b:match_ignorecase
+  endif
+  let startline = line(".")
+  let startcol = col(".")
+
+  " First step:  if not already done, set the script variables
+  "   s:do_BR	flag for whether there are backrefs
+  "   s:pat	parsed version of b:match_words
+  "   s:all	regexp based on s:pat and the default groups
+  " This part is copied and slightly modified from s:Match_wrapper().
+  let default = escape(&mps, '[$^.*~\\/?]') . (strlen(&mps) ? "," : "") .
+    \ '\/\*:\*\/,#\s*if\%(def\)\=:#\s*else\>:#\s*elif\>:#\s*endif\>'
+  " Allow b:match_words = "GetVimMatchWords()" .
+  if b:match_words =~ ":"
+    let match_words = b:match_words
+  else
+    execute "let match_words =" b:match_words
+  endif
+  if (match_words != s:last_words) || (&mps != s:last_mps) ||
+    \ exists("b:match_debug")
+    let s:last_words = match_words
+    let s:last_mps = &mps
+    if match_words !~ s:notslash . '\\\d'
+      let s:do_BR = 0
+      let s:pat = match_words
+    else
+      let s:do_BR = 1
+      let s:pat = s:ParseWords(match_words)
+    endif
+    let s:all = '\%(' . substitute(s:pat . (strlen(s:pat)?",":"") . default,
+      \	'[,:]\+','\\|','g') . '\)'
+    if exists("b:match_debug")
+      let b:match_pat = s:pat
+    endif
+  endif
+
+  " Second step:  figure out the patterns for searchpair()
+  " and save the screen, cursor position, and 'ignorecase'.
+  " - TODO:  A lot of this is copied from s:Match_wrapper().
+  " - maybe even more functionality should be split off
+  " - into separate functions!
+  let cdefault = (s:pat =~ '[^,]$' ? "," : "") . default
+  let open =  substitute(s:pat . cdefault,
+	\ s:notslash . '\zs:.\{-}' . s:notslash . ',', '\\),\\(', 'g')
+  let open =  '\(' . substitute(open, s:notslash . '\zs:.*$', '\\)', '')
+  let close = substitute(s:pat . cdefault,
+	\ s:notslash . '\zs,.\{-}' . s:notslash . ':', '\\),\\(', 'g')
+  let close = substitute(close, '^.\{-}' . s:notslash . ':', '\\(', '') . '\)'
+  if exists("b:match_skip")
+    let skip = b:match_skip
+  elseif exists("b:match_comment") " backwards compatibility and testing!
+    let skip = "r:" . b:match_comment
+  else
+    let skip = 's:comment\|string'
+  endif
+  let skip = s:ParseSkip(skip)
+  " let restore_cursor = line(".") . "G" . virtcol(".") . "|"
+  " normal! H
+  " let restore_cursor = "normal!" . line(".") . "Gzt" . restore_cursor
+  let restore_cursor = virtcol(".") . "|"
+  normal! g0
+  let restore_cursor = line(".") . "G" .  virtcol(".") . "|zs" . restore_cursor
+  normal! H
+  let restore_cursor = "normal!" . line(".") . "Gzt" . restore_cursor
+  execute restore_cursor
+
+  " Third step: call searchpair().
+  " Replace '\('--but not '\\('--with '\%(' and ',' with '\|'.
+  let openpat =  substitute(open, '\(\\\@<!\(\\\\\)*\)\@<=\\(', '\\%(', 'g')
+  let openpat = substitute(openpat, ',', '\\|', 'g')
+  let closepat = substitute(close, '\(\\\@<!\(\\\\\)*\)\@<=\\(', '\\%(', 'g')
+  let closepat = substitute(closepat, ',', '\\|', 'g')
+  if skip =~ 'synID' && !(has("syntax") && exists("g:syntax_on"))
+    let skip = '0'
+  else
+    execute "if " . skip . "| let skip = '0' | endif"
+  endif
+  mark '
+  let level = v:count1
+  while level
+    if searchpair(openpat, '', closepat, a:spflag, skip) < 1
+      call s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol)
+      return ""
+    endif
+    let level = level - 1
+  endwhile
+
+  " Restore options and return a string to restore the original position.
+  call s:CleanUp(restore_options, a:mode, startline, startcol)
+  return restore_cursor
+endfun
+
+" Search backwards for "if" or "while" or "<tag>" or ...
+" and return "endif" or "endwhile" or "</tag>" or ... .
+" For now, this uses b:match_words and the same script variables
+" as s:Match_wrapper() .  Later, it may get its own patterns,
+" either from a buffer variable or passed as arguments.
+" fun! s:Autocomplete()
+"   echo "autocomplete not yet implemented :-("
+"   if !exists("b:match_words") || b:match_words == ""
+"     return ""
+"   end
+"   let startpos = s:MultiMatch("bW")
+"
+"   if startpos == ""
+"     return ""
+"   endif
+"   " - TODO:  figure out whether 'if' or '<tag>' matched, and construct
+"   " - the appropriate closing.
+"   let matchline = getline(".")
+"   let curcol = col(".") - 1
+"   " - TODO:  Change the s:all argument if there is a new set of match pats.
+"   let regexp = s:Wholematch(matchline, s:all, curcol)
+"   let suf = strlen(matchline) - matchend(matchline, regexp)
+"   let prefix = (curcol ? '^.\{'  . curcol . '}\%(' : '^\%(')
+"   let suffix = (suf ? '\).\{' . suf . '}$'  : '\)$')
+"   " Reconstruct the version with unresolved backrefs.
+"   let patBR = substitute(b:match_words.',', '[,:]*,[,:]*', ',', 'g')
+"   let patBR = substitute(patBR, ':\{2,}', ':', "g")
+"   " Now, set group and groupBR to the matching group: 'if:endif' or
+"   " 'while:endwhile' or whatever.
+"   let group = s:Choose(s:pat, matchline, ",", ":", prefix, suffix, patBR)
+"   let i = matchend(group, s:notslash . ",")
+"   let groupBR = strpart(group, i)
+"   let group = strpart(group, 0, i-1)
+"   " Now, matchline =~ prefix . substitute(group,':','\|','g') . suffix
+"   if s:do_BR
+"     let group = s:InsertRefs(groupBR, prefix, group, suffix, matchline)
+"   endif
+" " let g:group = group
+"
+"   " - TODO:  Construct the closing from group.
+"   let fake = "end" . expand("<cword>")
+"   execute startpos
+"   return fake
+" endfun
+
+" Close all open structures.  "Get the heck out of here!"
+" fun! s:Gthhoh()
+"   let close = s:Autocomplete()
+"   while strlen(close)
+"     put=close
+"     let close = s:Autocomplete()
+"   endwhile
+" endfun
+
+" Parse special strings as typical skip arguments for searchpair():
+"   s:foo becomes (current syntax item) =~ foo
+"   S:foo becomes (current syntax item) !~ foo
+"   r:foo becomes (line before cursor) =~ foo
+"   R:foo becomes (line before cursor) !~ foo
+fun! s:ParseSkip(str)
+  let skip = a:str
+  if skip[1] == ":"
+    if skip[0] == "s"
+      let skip = "synIDattr(synID(line('.'),col('.'),1),'name') =~? '" .
+	\ strpart(skip,2) . "'"
+    elseif skip[0] == "S"
+      let skip = "synIDattr(synID(line('.'),col('.'),1),'name') !~? '" .
+	\ strpart(skip,2) . "'"
+    elseif skip[0] == "r"
+      let skip = "strpart(getline('.'),0,col('.'))=~'" . strpart(skip,2). "'"
+    elseif skip[0] == "R"
+      let skip = "strpart(getline('.'),0,col('.'))!~'" . strpart(skip,2). "'"
+    endif
+  endif
+  return skip
+endfun
+
+let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+unlet s:save_cpo
+
+" vim:sts=2:sw=2:

runtime/pack/dist/opt/shellmenu/plugin/shellmenu.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+" When you're writing shell scripts and you are in doubt which test to use,
+" which shell environment variables are defined, what the syntax of the case
+" statement is, and you need to invoke 'man sh'?
+"
+" Your problems are over now!
+"
+" Attached is a Vim script file for turning gvim into a shell script editor.
+" It may also be used as an example how to use menus in Vim.
+"
+" Written by: Lennart Schultz <les@dmi.min.dk>
+
+imenu Stmts.for	for  in 
+do
+
+doneki	kk0elli
+imenu Stmts.case	case  in
+) ;;
+esacbki	k0elli
+imenu Stmts.if	if   
+then
+
+fiki	kk0elli
+imenu Stmts.if-else	if   
+then
+
+else
+
+fiki	kki	kk0elli
+imenu Stmts.elif	elif   
+then
+
+ki	kk0elli
+imenu Stmts.while	while   
+do
+
+doneki	kk0elli
+imenu Stmts.break	break 
+imenu Stmts.continue	continue 
+imenu Stmts.function	() {
+
+}ki	k0i
+imenu Stmts.return	return 
+imenu Stmts.return-true	return 0
+imenu Stmts.return-false	return 1
+imenu Stmts.exit	exit 
+imenu Stmts.shift	shift 
+imenu Stmts.trap	trap 
+imenu Test.existence	[ -e  ]hi
+imenu Test.existence - file		[ -f  ]hi
+imenu Test.existence - file (not empty)	[ -s  ]hi
+imenu Test.existence - directory	[ -d  ]hi
+imenu Test.existence - executable	[ -x  ]hi
+imenu Test.existence - readable	[ -r  ]hi
+imenu Test.existence - writable	[ -w  ]hi
+imenu Test.String is empty [ x = "x$" ]hhi
+imenu Test.String is not empty [ x != "x$" ]hhi
+imenu Test.Strings is equal [ "" = "" ]hhhhhhhi
+imenu Test.Strings is not equal [ "" != "" ]hhhhhhhhi
+imenu Test.Values is greater than [  -gt  ]hhhhhhi
+imenu Test.Values is greater equal [  -ge  ]hhhhhhi
+imenu Test.Values is equal [  -eq  ]hhhhhhi
+imenu Test.Values is not equal [  -ne  ]hhhhhhi
+imenu Test.Values is less than [  -lt  ]hhhhhhi
+imenu Test.Values is less equal [  -le  ]hhhhhhi
+imenu ParmSub.Substitute word if parm not set ${:-}hhi
+imenu ParmSub.Set parm to word if not set ${:=}hhi
+imenu ParmSub.Substitute word if parm set else nothing ${:+}hhi
+imenu ParmSub.If parm not set print word and exit ${:?}hhi
+imenu SpShVars.Number of positional parameters ${#}
+imenu SpShVars.All positional parameters (quoted spaces) ${*}
+imenu SpShVars.All positional parameters (unquoted spaces) ${@}
+imenu SpShVars.Flags set ${-}
+imenu SpShVars.Return code of last command ${?}
+imenu SpShVars.Process number of this shell ${$}
+imenu SpShVars.Process number of last background command ${!}
+imenu Environ.HOME ${HOME}
+imenu Environ.PATH ${PATH}
+imenu Environ.CDPATH ${CDPATH}
+imenu Environ.MAIL ${MAIL}
+imenu Environ.MAILCHECK ${MAILCHECK}
+imenu Environ.PS1 ${PS1}
+imenu Environ.PS2 ${PS2}
+imenu Environ.IFS ${IFS}
+imenu Environ.SHACCT ${SHACCT}
+imenu Environ.SHELL ${SHELL}
+imenu Environ.LC_CTYPE ${LC_CTYPE}
+imenu Environ.LC_MESSAGES ${LC_MESSAGES}
+imenu Builtins.cd cd
+imenu Builtins.echo echo
+imenu Builtins.eval eval
+imenu Builtins.exec exec
+imenu Builtins.export export
+imenu Builtins.getopts getopts
+imenu Builtins.hash hash

runtime/pack/dist/opt/swapmouse/plugin/swapmouse.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+" These macros swap the left and right mouse buttons (for left handed)
+" Don't forget to do ":set mouse=a" or the mouse won't work at all
+noremap	 <LeftMouse>	<RightMouse>
+noremap	 <2-LeftMouse>	<2-RightMouse>
+noremap	 <3-LeftMouse>	<3-RightMouse>
+noremap	 <4-LeftMouse>	<4-RightMouse>
+noremap	 <LeftDrag>	<RightDrag>
+noremap	 <LeftRelease>	<RightRelease>
+noremap	 <RightMouse>	<LeftMouse>
+noremap	 <2-RightMouse>	<2-LeftMouse>
+noremap	 <3-RightMouse>	<3-LeftMouse>
+noremap	 <4-RightMouse>	<4-LeftMouse>
+noremap	 <RightDrag>	<LeftDrag>
+noremap	 <RightRelease>	<LeftRelease>
+noremap	 g<LeftMouse>	<C-RightMouse>
+noremap	 g<RightMouse>	<C-LeftMouse>
+noremap! <LeftMouse>	<RightMouse>
+noremap! <LeftDrag>	<RightDrag>
+noremap! <LeftRelease>	<RightRelease>
+noremap! <RightMouse>	<LeftMouse>
+noremap! <RightDrag>	<LeftDrag>
+noremap! <RightRelease>	<LeftRelease>

runtime/syntax/fortran.vim

@@ -1,15 +1,16 @@
 " Vim syntax file
 " Language:	Fortran 2008 (and older: Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77)
-" Version:	0.96
-" Last Change:	2015 Nov. 30
+" Version:	0.97
+" Last Change:	2016 Feb. 26
 " Maintainer:	Ajit J. Thakkar <ajit@unb.ca>; <http://www2.unb.ca/~ajit/>
 " Usage:	For instructions, do :help fortran-syntax from Vim
 " Credits:
-"  Version 0.1 was based on the fortran 77 syntax file by Mario Eusebio and
-"  Preben Guldberg. Useful suggestions and contributions were made by: Andrej Panjkov,
-"  Bram Moolenaar, Thomas Olsen, Michael Sternberg, Christian Reile,
+"  Version 0.1 (April 2000) was based on the fortran 77 syntax file by Mario Eusebio and
+"  Preben Guldberg. Since then, useful suggestions and contributions have been made,
+"  in chronological order, by:
+"  Andrej Panjkov, Bram Moolenaar, Thomas Olsen, Michael Sternberg, Christian Reile,
 "  Walter Dieudonn<6E>, Alexander Wagner, Roman Bertle, Charles Rendleman,
-"  Andrew Griffiths, Joe Krahn, Hendrik Merx, and Matt Thompson.
+"  Andrew Griffiths, Joe Krahn, Hendrik Merx, Matt Thompson, and Jan Hermann.
 
 if exists("b:current_syntax")
   finish
@@ -407,7 +408,7 @@ if exists("fortran_fold")
     else
       syn region fortran77Loop transparent fold keepend start="\<do\s\+\z(\d\+\)" end="^\s*\z1\>" contains=ALLBUT,fortranUnitHeader,fortranStructure,fortranStorageClass,fortranType,fortranProgram,fortranModule,fortranSubroutine,fortranFunction,fortranBlockData
       syn region fortran90Loop transparent fold keepend extend start="\(\<end\s\+\)\@<!\<do\(\s\+\a\|\s*$\)" skip="^\s*[!#].*$" excludenl end="\<end\s*do\>" contains=ALLBUT,fortranUnitHeader,fortranStructure,fortranStorageClass,fortranType,fortranProgram,fortranModule,fortranSubroutine,fortranFunction,fortranBlockData
-      syn region fortranIfBlock transparent fold keepend extend start="\(\<e\(nd\|lse\)\s\+\)\@<!\<if\s*(.\+)\s*then\>" skip="^\s*[!#].*$" end="\<end\s*if\>" contains=ALLBUT,fortranUnitHeader,fortranStructure,fortranStorageClass,fortranType,fortranProgram,fortranModule,fortranSubroutine,fortranFunction,fortranBlockData
+      syn region fortranIfBlock transparent fold keepend extend start="\(\<e\(nd\|lse\)\s\+\)\@<!\<if\s*(\(.\|&\s*\n\)\+)\(\s\|&\s*\n\)*then\>" skip="^\s*[!#].*$" end="\<end\s*if\>" contains=ALLBUT,fortranUnitHeader,fortranStructure,fortranStorageClass,fortranType,fortranProgram,fortranModule,fortranSubroutine,fortranFunction,fortranBlockData
       syn region fortranCase transparent fold keepend extend start="\<select\s*case\>" skip="^\s*[!#].*$" end="\<end\s*select\>" contains=ALLBUT,fortranUnitHeader,fortranStructure,fortranStorageClass,fortranType,fortranProgram,fortranModule,fortranSubroutine,fortranFunction,fortranBlockData
     endif
   endif

runtime/syntax/python.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim syntax file
 " Language:	Python
 " Maintainer:	Zvezdan Petkovic <zpetkovic@acm.org>
-" Last Change:	2015 Sep 15
+" Last Change:	2016 Feb 20
 " Credits:	Neil Schemenauer <nas@python.ca>
 "		Dmitry Vasiliev
 "
@@ -199,6 +199,8 @@ if !exists("python_no_builtin_highlight")
   syn keyword pythonBuiltin	ascii bytes exec
   " non-essential built-in functions; Python 2 only
   syn keyword pythonBuiltin	apply buffer coerce intern
+  " avoid highlighting attributes as builtins
+  syn match   pythonAttribute	/\.\h\w*/hs=s+1 contains=ALLBUT,pythonBuiltin transparent
 endif
 
 " From the 'Python Library Reference' class hierarchy at the bottom.